6 series
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you
will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you
make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The
manual also contains information designed to enhance operating
reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the
value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or
integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the
printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
© 2012 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/12, 07 12 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 230.
6 Notes
At a glance
12 Cockpit
16 iDrive
22 Voice activation system
25 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Controls
30 Opening and closing
51 Adjusting
60 Transporting children safely
63 Driving
76 Displays
93 Lamps
98 Safety
118 Driving stability control systems
126 Driving comfort
148 Climate control
153 Interior equipment
158 Storage compartments
Driving tips
164 Things to remember when driving
167 Loading
169 Saving fuel
Mobility
176 Refueling
178 Fuel
179 Wheels and tires
189 Engine compartment
191 Engine oil
194 Coolant
195 Maintenance
198 Replacing components
204 Breakdown assistance
210 Care
Reference
218 Technical data
221 Short commands of the voice act. system
230 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for
the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen‐
dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.
User's manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication are described in a separate us‐
er's manual, which is also included with the on‐
board literature.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any questions, your service
center will be glad to advise you at any time.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com.
Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per‐
sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐
tion.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐
lect individual functions.
Refers to measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rele‐
vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐
mation on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle equipment
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipment is
also described and illustrated that is not availa‐
ble in your vehicle, e.g. because of the selected
optional equipment or the country-specific var‐
iants.
This also applies for safety-related functions
and systems.
For options and equipment not described in this
Owner's Manual, please refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are
arranged differently than shown in the illustra‐
tions.
Status of the Owner's Manual
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
icy of constant development that is conceived
to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody
the highest quality and safety standards. In rare
cases, therefore, the features described in this
Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for
the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen‐
dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Seite 6
Notes
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics, re‐
quires suitable maintenance and repair meth‐
ods.
Therefore, have this work performed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.
Parts and Accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐
cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐
chase accessories tested and approved by
BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐
ously acquire the assurance that they have been
thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum
performance when installed on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from de‐
fects in material and workmanship. BMW will not
accept any liability for damage resulting from in‐
stallation of parts and accessories not approved
by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made
by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used
on a BMW safely and without risk to either the
vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine
BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other prod‐
ucts approved by BMW, together with profes‐
sional advice on using these items, are available
from all BMW centers. Installation and operation
of non-BMW approved accessories such as
alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors,
wheels, suspension components, brake dust
shields, telephones, including operation of any
mobile phone from within the vehicle without
using an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐
ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-
talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may
cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐
promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's
electrical system or affect the validity of the
BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center
for additional information. Maintenance, re‐
placement, or repair of the emission control de‐
vices and systems may be performed by any au‐
tomotive repair establishment or individual
using any certified automotive part.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile
components and parts, including components
found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, con‐
tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal‐
ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re‐
productive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Always protect your skin by washing
thoroughly with soap and water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
Seite 7
Notes
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to deliver
the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op‐
erated under those conditions. If you wish to op‐
erate your vehicle in another country or region,
you may be required to adapt your vehicle to
meet different prevailing operating conditions
and homologation requirements. You should
also be aware of any applicable warranty limita‐
tions or exclusions for such country or region. In
such case, please contact Customer Relations
for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road
safety, operational reliability and the New Vehi‐
cle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov‐
ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited War‐
ranty.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about mo‐
tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehi‐
cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 8
Notes
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Seite 9
Notes
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
All around the steering wheel
1 Opening and closing the rear win‐
dow 43
2 Open and close side windows to‐
gether 42
3 Open and close rear windows 42
4 Open and close front windows 42
5 Exterior mirror operation 57
6 Driver assistance systems
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 115
Collision warning 107, 109
Lane departure warning 114
Night Vision with pedestrian de‐
tection 111
Head-up Display 146
7 Lamps
Front fog lamps 96
Parking lamps 93
Seite 12
At a glance Cockpit
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Low beams 93
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 94
Daytime running lights 94
Adaptive light control 95
High-beam Assistant 95
Instrument lighting 96
8 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 69
High beams, head‐
lamp flasher 69
High-beam Assistant 95
Roadside parking lamps 94
Computer 87
9 Shift paddles 74
10 Steering wheel buttons, left
Store speed 132, 126
Resume speed 134, 128
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐
ing 127
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐
ing 132
Increase distance 128
Reduce distance 128
Cruise control rocker switch 133, 127
11 Instrument cluster 76
12 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source
Volume
Voice activation 22
Phone, see user's manual for Nav‐
igation, Entertainment and Com‐
munication.
Thumbwheel for selection lists 87
13 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers 70
Rain sensor 71
Clean the windshields and head‐
lamps 71
14 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 64
15 Automatic Engine Start/Stop
Function 65
16 Horn
17 Steering wheel heating 59
18 Adjust the steering wheel 59
19 Unlocking the hood
20 Open the trunk lid 38
Seite 13
Cockpit At a glance
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
All around the center console
1 All around the interior rearview mir‐
ror 15
2 Control Display 16
3 Glove compartment 158
4 Air vent 151
5 Hazard warning system 204
Central locking system 37
6 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
7 Automatic climate control 148
8 Controller with buttons 16
9 Parking brake 67
Automatic Hold 68
10 Opening and closing the
convertible top 45
11 PDC Park Distance Control 134
Top View 139
Backup camera 136
Parking assistant 142
Side View 141
HDC Hill Descent Control 120
12 Driving Experience Switch 122
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 118
13 Transmission selector lever
Seite 14
At a glance Cockpit
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
iDrive
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude
of switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
ated from a central location.
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf‐
fic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance
Controls
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and create the settings.
Control Display
Notes
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
Switching off
1. Press the button.
2. "Switch off control display"
Switching on
Press the controller again to switch the screen
back on.
Controller
Select menu items and create settings.
1.
Turn.
Seite 16
At a glance iDrive
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
2. Press.
3. Move in four directions.
Buttons on controller
Press the button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia
menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation
menu.
TEL Opens the Telephone
menu.
BACK Displays the previous
panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Selecting menu items
Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1.
Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Seite 17
iDrive At a glance
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
The current panel is closed and the previous
panel is displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
current panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened on top of the previous
display.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate
that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu
When a menu is opened, it generally opens with
the panel that was last selected in that menu. To
display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is dis‐
played.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
This area remains unchanged.
▷ Control options for the selected main menu,
e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Changing settings
1.
Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Seite 18
At a glance iDrive
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
1. Press the button. The main menu is
displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the sta‐
tus field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Telephone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio™ is switched on.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Wireless network reception strength
Symbol flashes: searching for net‐
work.
Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
Seite 19
iDrive At a glance
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Symbol Meaning
Text message was received.
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
SIM card is missing.
Enter the PIN.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are switched off.
Request of the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the onboard computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
1.
Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Saving a function
1.
Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2. Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Running a function
Press the button.
Seite 20
At a glance iDrive
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
The function will run immediately. This means,
for example, that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at the top edge
of the screen.
▷ To display short information: touch the but‐
ton.
▷ To display detailed information: touch the
button for an extended period.
Deleting the button assignments
1.
Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds.
2. "OK"
Entering letters and numbers
General information
1.
Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the letter
or number.
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Enter a blank space.
Switching between cases, letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Move the controller up.
Without navigation system
Select the symbol.
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered and
letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during the en‐
try for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: town/city names can be
entered using the spelling of language avail‐
able on the Control Display.
Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Voice activation system
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
The concept
▷ Most functions that are displayed on the
Control Display can be operated by spoken
commands via the voice activation system.
The system prompts you to make your en‐
tries.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated us‐
ing the voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation sys‐
tem.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identified.
Set the language, refer to page 91.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
The command is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, operate the
function in this case via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on which
menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
There are short commands for functions of the
main menu.
Some list entries, e.g. Phone book entries, can
also be selected via the voice activation system.
Speak these list entries exactly as they are dis‐
played in the respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹
For example, if the "Settings" menu is displayed,
the commands for the settings are read out loud.
Executing functions using short
commands
Functions on the main menu can be performed
directly by means of short commands, nearly ir‐
Seite 22
At a glance Voice activation system
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
respective of which menu item is currently se‐
lected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands of the voice activation
system, refer to page 221.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the
current operating options and the most im‐
portant commands for them are announced.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the voice
activation system is announced.
Example: playing back a CD
1.
Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›C D and multimedia‹
The medium last played is played back.
4. ›C D track ...‹ e.g., CD track 4.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the
standard dialog or a shorter version.
In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the an‐
nouncements from the system are issued in an
abbreviated form.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button while giving an instruc‐
tion until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel‐
ephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 204, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ When selecting a radio station, use the com‐
mon pronunciation of the station name:
Seite 23
Voice activation system At a glance
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
›Station ...‹ e. g. Classic Radio station
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and convertible
top closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 24
At a glance Voice activation system
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle
The integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. The equipment
and functions that are in the vehicle are descri‐
bed therein.
Components of the integrated Owner's
Manual
The integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or access possibilities.
Quick Reference Guide
Located in the Quick Reference is important in‐
formation for the operation of the vehicle, the
operation of basic vehicle functions or for what
to do in the event of a flat tire. This information
can also be displayed during driving.
Search by pictures
Information and descriptions based on illustra‐
tions can be searched via search by pictures.
This is helpful, for example, if the description of
an outfitting package that cannot be named is
needed.
Owner's Manual
Information and descriptions can be searched
by direct entry of a search term via the index.
Select components
1. Press the button.
2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".
3. Press the controller.
4. Selecting desired range:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.
Page by page without link access
Leaf through the pages directly while skipping
the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
the controller to leaf from page to page.
Leaf back.
Leaf forward.
Context help - Owner's Manual to the
temporarily selected function
The relevant information can be opened directly.
Seite 25
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Opening via the iDrive
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the options menu:
1. Press the button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
switch between the two displays:
1.
Press the button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to the
function displayed last.
5. Press the button to return to the page
of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To switch back and forth repeatedly between
the function displayed last and the page of the
Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4
and 5. This opens a new panel every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly.
Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.
2. Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press the button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
Seite 26
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Seite 27
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that are
useful for driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Trunk lid
4 Panic mode, headl. courtesy delay feat.
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls
with keys.
Every remote control contains a replaceable
battery.
The settings called up and implemented when
the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the vehicle, Personal
Profile, refer to page 31.
In addition, information about service require‐
ments is stored in the remote control, Service
data in the remote control, refer to page 195.
Integrated key
Press the button on the back of the remote con‐
trol, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door.
▷ Storage compartment in the center armrest.
The storage compartment contains a switch for
separately securing the trunk lid, refer to
page 39.
Replacing the battery
1.
Take the integrated key out of the remote
control.
2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment; see arrow 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing upwards.
5. Press the cover closed.
Seite 30
Controls Opening and closing
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Take the used battery to a recycling cen‐
ter or to your service center.
New remote controls
You can obtain new remote controls from your
service center.
Loss of the remote controls
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
service center.
Emergency detection of remote control
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the
engine in situations such as the following:
▷ Interference of radio transmission to remote
control by external sources.
▷ Discharged battery in the remote control.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by mobile
devices in close proximity to the remote
control.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by
charger while charging items such as mobile
devices in the vehicle.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start
the engine.
Starting the engine in case of
emergency detection of remote control
Automatic transmission: if a corresponding
Check Control message appears, hold the re‐
mote control, as shown, against the marked area
on the steering column and press the Start/Stop
button within 10 seconds while pressing the
brake.
Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check
Control message appears, hold the remote con‐
trol, as shown, against the marked area on the
steering column and press the Start/Stop button
within 10 seconds while pressing the clutch
pedal.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set several of your vehicle's functions
to suit your personal needs and preferences.
▷ The settings are automatically saved in the
profile currently activated.
▷ The remote control used is detected when
the vehicle is unlocked and the stored profile
is called up.
▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
and called up again even if the vehicle has
been used in the meantime by someone else
with another remote control.
The individual settings are stored for three Per‐
sonal Profiles and one guest profile.
Transmitting the settings
Your personal settings can be taken with you to
another vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐
file function. For more information, contact your
service center.
Transmission takes place via:
▷ The USB interface in the glove compart‐
ment onto a USB device.
Seite 31
Opening and closing Controls
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Profile management
Opening the profiles
A different profile can be called up than the one
associated with the remote control currently in
use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Select a profile.
The profile that is opened is assigned to the re‐
mote control currently in use.
Renaming profiles
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Rename current profile"
Resetting profiles
The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "Settings"
3. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Reset current profile"
Importing profiles
Existing settings and contacts are overwritten
with the imported profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
4. USB interface, refer to page 158: "USB
device"
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the active profile and the saved
contacts can be exported.
This can be useful for storing and opening per‐
sonal settings, e.g. if settings are accidentally
changed or deleted.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile"
4. USB interface, refer to page 158: "USB
device"
Seite 32
Controls Opening and closing
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Using the guest profile
The guest profile can be used to make individual
settings without affecting the three Personal
Profiles.
This can be useful for drivers who are using the
vehicle temporarily and do not have their own
profile.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. The current profile is selected.
4. Open "Guest".
5. Adjust the settings.
Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed.
Display profile list during start
The profile list can be displayed during each
start for selecting the desired profile.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display user list at startup"
Personal Profile settings
The following functions and settings can be
stored in a profile.
More information on the settings can be found
under:
▷ Active Cruise Control: collision warning.
▷ Collision warning: warning time, last setting
on/off.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ CD/Multimedia: audio source listened to
last.
▷ Driving Experience Switch: sport program.
▷ Driver's seat position: automatic retrieval af‐
ter unlocking.
▷ Programmable memory buttons: assign‐
ment.
▷ Head-up Display: selection, brightness, po‐
sition and rotation of the display.
▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature: time set‐
ting.
▷ Tone: tone settings.
▷ Automatic climate control: settings.
▷ Steering wheel position.
▷ Navigation: map views, route criteria, voice
output on/off.
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian detection: se‐
lection of functions and type of display.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC: adjusting the
signal tone volume.
▷ Radio: stored stations, station listened to
last, special settings.
▷ Backup camera: selection of functions and
type of display.
▷ Side View: selection of the display type.
▷ Language on the Control Display.
▷ Lane departure warning: last setting, on/off.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection: last setting, on/
off.
▷ Daytime running lights: current setting.
▷ Triple turn signal activation.
▷ Locking the vehicle: after a brief period or
after starting to drive.
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system becomes active
when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and re‐
leases the locks on the following:
▷ Doors.
▷ Compartment in the center armrest.
▷ Trunk lid.
▷ Fuel filler flap.
Seite 33
Opening and closing Controls
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Operating from the outside
▷ Via the remote control.
▷ Via the driver's door lock.
▷ Via the door handles.
▷ Via the button in the trunk lid.
The following takes place simultaneously when
locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote
control:
▷ Depending on how the vehicle is equipped,
the theft protection is activated/deactivated.
Theft protection prevents the doors from
being unlocked using the lock buttons or the
door opener.
▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
courtesy lamps are switched on and off.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 40, is
armed or disarmed.
Operating from the inside
Via the button for the central locking system.
If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the
fuel filler flap and the compartment in the center
armrest remain unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
central locking system unlocks automatically.
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
come on.
Opening and closing: from the
outside
Using the remote control
General information
Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking
Press the button on the remote control.
The vehicle is unlocked.
Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesy
lamps are switched on.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. With professional navigation system:
"Unlock button:"
Without professional navigation system:
Select a symbol.
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped or the
country-specific variant, you can set whether
the doors are also unlocked with the but‐
ton on the remote control.
Seite 34
Controls Opening and closing
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Convenient opening
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control.
The side windows and the rear window are fully
opened.
With Comfort Access, the remote control can be
used to open the convertible top when in the vi‐
cinity of the vehicle.
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control until the convertible top is
fully opened and the convertible top well storage
cover is fully closed.
Danger of pinching
Monitor the opening process to ensure
that no one becomes trapped; otherwise, inju‐
ries may result.◀
Releasing the button stops the motion.
Leaving the vicinity of the vehicle stops the mo‐
tion of the convertible top.
After a short period, the convertible top and the
convertible top well storage cover are lowered
slowly. The convertible top and the convertible
top well storage cover are not locked. Press the
button again until the convertible top operation
is completed.
Locking
Press the button on the remote control.
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Convenient closing
With Comfort Access, the remote control can be
used to close the convertible top, the side win‐
dows, and the rear window when in the vicinity
of the vehicle.
Hold down the remote control button until
the closing operation is completed.
Monitor the closing process
Monitor the closing process to ensure that
no one becomes trapped.◀
Releasing the button or leaving the vicinity of the
vehicle stops the motion.
After a short period, the convertible top and the
convertible top well storage cover are lowered
slowly. The convertible top and the convertible
top well storage cover are not locked. Press the
button again until the convertible top operation
is completed.
Switching on interior lamps and
courtesy lamps
Press the button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote control
for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching on the headlamp courtesy
delay feature
Briefly press the button on the remote
control.
The duration can be set in the Control Display.
Opening the trunk lid
Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it was
previously locked or unlocked.
Seite 35
Opening and closing Controls
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid
can only be opened using the remote control if
the vehicle was unlocked first.
To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do
not place the remote control into the cargo area.
The trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is
pushed closed.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐
tion signals.
▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Retrieving the seat, mirror, and
steering wheel settings
The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering
wheel positions selected last are stored for the
currently used remote control.
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions
are automatically retrieved if this function was
activated.
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
If this function is used, first make sure that
the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty.
Otherwise, people can be injured or objects
damaged when the seat is moved back.◀
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
▷ When a button of the seat, mirror, and steer‐
ing wheel memory is pressed briefly.
Activating the setting
1.
"Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Last seat position auto."
Malfunction
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐
locked with the remote control, the battery may
be discharged or there may be interference from
external sources such as mobile phones, metal
objects, overhead power lines, transmission
towers, etc.
If this occurs, unlock or lock the vehicle at the
door lock using the integrated key.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
▷ MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Seite 36
Controls Opening and closing
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Using the door lock
General information
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Remove the key before pulling the door
handle
Before pulling the outside door handle, remove
the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the
key.◀
In some country-specific versions, the alarm
system is triggered if the vehicle is unlocked via
the door lock.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control, or switch on the igni‐
tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of the
remote control.
In some vehicle equipment versions, only the
driver's door can be unlocked or locked via the
door lock.
Locking the doors and trunk lid at once
To lock all doors and the trunk lid at once:
1.
With the doors closed, lock the vehicle using
the button for the central locking system in
the interior.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐
senger door.
3. Lock the vehicle.
▷ Lock the driver's door using the
integrated key in the door lock, or
▷ Press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door from
the outside.
The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the
remote control.
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or unlock
the vehicle using the integrated key via the door
lock on the driver's door.
Opening and closing: from the
inside
Locking and unlocking
Pressing the buttons locks and unlocks the
doors and the trunk lid when the doors are
closed, but they are not secured against theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Unlocking and opening
▷ Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
▷ Pull the door opener twice individually on
each door: the first time unlocks the door,
the second time opens it.
Seite 37
Opening and closing Controls
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Automatic locking
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if a door is not
opened.
▷ "Lock after start. to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive away.
Doors
Automatic Soft Closing
To close the doors, push lightly.
It is closed automatically.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Trunk lid
Opening
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
fore opening.
Opening from the outside
▷ Press on the top half of the BMW emblem.
▷ Press the button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second.
The trunk lid cannot be opened if the convertible
top is not fully opened or closed.
Opening from the inside
Push the button in the driver's footwell.
If the vehicle is stationary, the trunk lid opens if
it is not locked.
Closing
Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk
lid make it easier to pull down the lid.
Keep the closing path clear
Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote
Seite 38
Controls Opening and closing
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
control is locked inside the vehicle when the
trunk lid is closed.◀
Locking the vehicle
Press the button on the inside of the trunk lid.
When the driver's door is closed, the vehicle is
completely locked.
Locking separately
The trunk lid can be locked separately using the
switch in the center armrest.
▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1.
▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐
row 2.
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This
secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from the
central locking system.
When the center armrest is locked with the
integrated key, the trunk lid cannot be opened.
This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked us‐
ing valet service. The infrared remote control
can be handed out without the key.
Emergency unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The trunk lid unlocks.
Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Unlocking of the trunk lid separately.
▷ Starting the engine.
Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence nearby.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
be located outside of the vehicle.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the remote
control is inside the vehicle.
Seite 39
Opening and closing Controls
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
The functions can be controlled by pressing the
buttons of the remote control or Comfort Ac‐
cess.
Unlocking
Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This corre‐
sponds to pressing the button on the remote
control.
Locking
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with
your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the button on
the remote control.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
hicle.
Unlocking the trunk lid separately
Press on the top half of the BMW emblem on the
trunk lid.
This corresponds to pressing the button
on the remote control.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote
control is locked inside the vehicle when the
trunk lid is closed.◀
Malfunction
Comfort Access may not function properly if it
experiences interference from external sources
such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead
power lines, transmission towers, etc.
In this case, open or close the vehicle using the
buttons on the remote control or use the
integrated key in the door lock.
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds to:
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the trunk lid.
▷ Movements in the vehicle.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the
car.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
▷ By flashing the high beams.
Arming and disarming the alarm
system
General information
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control, Comfort Access or at the
door lock the alarm system is armed or disarmed
at the same time.
Seite 40
Controls Opening and closing
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Door lock and armed alarm system
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm
on some country-specific versions.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the ignition,
if necessary, by emergency detection of the re‐
mote control.
Trunk lid and armed alarm system
The trunk lid can be opened using the remote
control, even if the alarm system is armed.
Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and
monitored again by the alarm system. The haz‐
ard warning system flashes once.
In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid
can only be opened using the remote control if
the vehicle was unlocked first.
Panic mode
Press the button on the remote control
for at least 3 seconds.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying the
remote control with you, pull on the door
handle.
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The system is armed.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
cured.
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes
continuously. Interior motion sensor and tilt
alarm sensor are not active.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine is started, but no longer than
approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
towed.
Interior motion sensor
The interior is monitored to the height of the seat
cushions. The alarm system is armed together
with the interior motion sensor even when the
convertible top is open. Falling objects such as
leaves can trigger the alarm unintentionally.
Seite 41
Opening and closing Controls
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can be switched off together, such as in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
Power windows
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the power windows and injure
themselves.◀
Closing the windows when driving
To close the side windows when driving,
first close the rear windows or all four windows
at the same time; otherwise, the windows may
not close tightly at high speeds.◀
Opening individually
▷ Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically.
Pressing again stops the motion.
Convenient opening, refer to page 35, via the
remote control.
Closing individually
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is clear;
otherwise, injuries may result.◀
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point.
The window closes while the switch is held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically.
Pressing the switch stops the motion.
Convenient operation, refer to page 35, via the
remote control.
Opening/closing together
▷ Press the switch to the resistance
point.
Seite 42
Controls Opening and closing
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
All side windows open while the switch is
being held.
Similarly, the windows close while the
switch is being pulled.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
All side windows open automatically.
Pressing again stops the motion.
Similarly, the windows are automatically
closed when the switch is pulled past the
resistance point.
Rear window
Opening
▷ Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The rear window opens while the switch is
being held.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The rear window opens automatically.
The rear window opens and closes automati‐
cally when the convertible top is opened or
closed.
Closing
Pull the switch.
The rear window closes while the switch
is being held.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted.
The window reopens slightly.
The rear window is not equipped with pinch pro‐
tection.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
No window accessories
Do not install any accessories in the range
of movement of the windows; otherwise, the
pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is clear;
otherwise, injuries may result.◀
For example, if there is an external danger or if
ice on the windows prevents a window from
closing normally, proceed as follows:
1.
Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there.
Pinch protection is limited and the window
reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without pinch protec‐
tion.
Convertible top
General information
The convertible top can be opened or closed at
speeds up to approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
If the vehicle is accelerated above a speed of
approx. 30 mph/50 km/h while the convertible
top is being moved, the convertible top move‐
ment stops.
Seite 43
Opening and closing Controls
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Tips about the convertible top:
▷ If possible, close the convertible top when
the vehicle is parked. A closed convertible
top protects it from weather-related dam‐
age and to some extent from theft.
▷ Event when the convertible top is closed,
only store valuables in the locked cargo area.
▷ At higher speeds, vacuum produced in the
passenger compartment cause the
convertible top to begin to flatten. Increase
the amount of air via the automatic climate
control so that no vacuum is produced in the
vehicle.
Notes
The trunk lid cannot be opened if the convertible
top is not fully opened or closed.
Safety information about the convertible
top
▷ With temperatures below +14 ℉/-10 ℃ do
not open the convertible top; otherwise
damages could result.
▷ Do not leave the open convertible top in the
convertible top well longer than one day
while the top is still wet; otherwise, damage
could result due to moisture.
▷ The convertible top pivots up during open‐
ing and closing. When the top is moved, e.g.
in garages, make sure that there is a mini‐
mum height of 79 inches/2 meters; other‐
wise, it damages may result.
▷ Do not place any objects on the convertible
top, otherwise, they could fall and cause
damage or injuries.
▷ When the rollover protection system is ex‐
tended, do not under any circumstances
move the convertible top.
▷ Always open or close the convertible top
completely. Convertible top and convertible
top well storage cover are locked in the final
positions. Driving with the convertible tope
or convertible top well storage cover un‐
locked can result in damage.
▷ Do not reach into the convertible top mech‐
anism during the opening and closing oper‐
ation. Keep children away from the opening
path of the convertible top, otherwise, there
is a risk of injury.
▷ When the convertible top is opened during
driving, be alert to traffic; otherwise, it may
result in an accident. If possible, do not move
the convertible top while driving in reverse
because rearward vision is severely im‐
paired while the convertible top is in motion.
During windy conditions, do not operate the
convertible top while driving. Do not drive
faster than 30 mph/50 km/h; otherwise, ve‐
hicle damage may occur.
▷ Do not attach any roof carrier systems; oth‐
erwise, an accident may occur.◀
Functional requirements
The ignition or radio ready state must be
switched on.
It is not possible to start the engine and operate
the convertible top simultaneously. When the
engine is started, the convertible top movement
is briefly interrupted.
Under the following conditions, the convertible
top movement cannot be moved and a Check
Control message is displayed.
▷ Cargo area partition is flipped up.
▷ Trunk lid is open.
▷ External temperature is too low.
▷ Vehicle system too low.
▷ Convertible top drive is overheating.
▷ Movement of the convertible top not al‐
lowed because of national regulations.
▷ Vehicle speed is too high.
Before opening and closing
▷ Follow the safety instructions for the
convertible top.
▷ Make sure that the cargo area partition in the
cargo area is folded down.
Seite 44
Controls Opening and closing
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
▷ Make sure that the cargo does not push
against the cargo area partition from below.
▷ Make sure that the trunk lid is closed.
Convertible top switch
1 Switch
2 LEDs
Opening and closing from the inside
In order to protect the battery, move the
convertible top only when the engine is running
if possible.
Before closing the convertible top, remove any
foreign objects from the windshield frame; oth‐
erwise, closing may be prevented.
▷ Press and hold the switch. The
convertible top opens while the
switch is being pressed.
▷ Pull the switch and hold it. The
convertible top closes while the
switch is being pulled.
Push or pull switch until the convertible top is
completely open or closed and the end of the
procedure is indicated by a corresponding
Check Control message. Always make sure that
the convertible top well storage cover is com‐
pletely closed. If the convertible top is com‐
pletely open or closed, convertible top and
convertible top well storage cover are latched.
The side windows and the rear window go down
when the convertible top control switch is pulled
or pushed.
LEDs
▷ Left LED lights up green: convertible top is
opened or closed. If the operation is com‐
pleted, the LED goes out and a correspond‐
ing Check Control message is displayed.
▷ Right LED flashes red after the switch is re‐
leased: operating sequence has not yet con‐
cluded.
▷ Right LED comes on red when the switch is
pressed: cargo area partition is flipped up,
trunk lid is not closed or there is a malfunc‐
tion. Convertible top cannot be moved.
In addition to the red LED, a check control mes‐
sage is displayed.
Interruption
Always open/close the convertible top
completely
A convertible top that is not opened or closed
completely is not locked and represents a haz‐
ard.◀
The convertible top movement is interrupted if
the switch is released. The sequence can be
continued in the desired direction using the
switch.
If there is a longer interruption, convertible top
and convertible top well storage cover remain
approx. 10 minutes in the current position be‐
fore they slowly go down. The convertible top
and the convertible top well storage cover are
not locked. Operate switch again until the
convertible operation is terminated.
Convenient operation from outside
When equipped with Comfort Access the
convertible top can also be operated from out‐
side:
▷ Convenient opening with remote operation,
refer to page 35.
▷ Convenient closing with the remote control,
refer to page 35.
Seite 45
Opening and closing Controls
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Cargo area partition
Fold down cargo area partition in the back so
that the convertible top can be opened.
Fold down cargo area partition in the front in or‐
der to enlarge the cargo area capacity when the
convertible top is closed.
Manually close convertible top
If there is a defect, the convertible top can be
manually closed. Two persons are necessary to
do this.
Do not manually open convertible top and
close it manually only in emergency situa‐
tions.
Do not manually open the convertible top. The
convertible top well storage cover cannot latch
if there is an electrical defect and would open
during driving.
Manually close the convertible top only in emer‐
gency situations.
Damage can result from improper handling.◀
Tools
Tools for manually closing the convertible top
are located in the insert of the rear seat backrest
under the first aid kit.
1.
Remove insert, refer to page 205.
2. Remove the first aid kit.
3. Remove tools.
1 Convertible top tool
2 Adapter
3 Rear window tool
Before closing
1.
Open trunk lid, refer to page 38.
Depending on the reason for the defect, it
may be the case that the trunk lid cannot be
opened. Then the convertible top cannot be
manually closed.
2. Remove the two large caps from the trim. If
necessary, use a screwdriver to help with
this.
3. Unlock convertible top well storage cover.
To do this, pull on the right cap and simul‐
taneously slightly raise the front right
convertible top well storage cover in front of
the rear window.
Proceed accordingly on the left side.
4. When the convertible top is closed man‐
ually, the trunk lid can no longer be opened.
Seite 46
Controls Opening and closing
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Remove urgently needed items from the
cargo area and close the trunk lid.
5. Lower the side window and the rear window
completely.
If the rear window cannot be lowered elec‐
trically, it must be lowered manually.
Manually lowering rear window
The spindle for lowering the rear window is lo‐
cated in front of the rear window in the center
beneath the convertible top well storage cover.
1. Have a second person slightly raise the
convertible top well storage cover, arrow 1,
and hold it.
2. Insert the rear window tool through the fun‐
nel-shaped opening into the spindle, ar‐
row 2. Turn the spindle clockwise, arrow 3,
until the rear window is all the way down.
Lifting out convertible top
Only close the convertible top with two
people
Carry out the following steps with the aid of a
second person and with the doors open; other‐
wise, it may result in damage to the convertible
top.◀
1. Grasp the convertible top well storage cover
on both sides, swing it up until it reaches its
limit position and hold it in place.
2. Remove the cover in the center of the front
convertible top frame. If necessary, use a
screwdriver to help with this.
3. Insert the convertible top tool into the
convertible top lock. Turn the convertible
top tool approx. one half turn clockwise to
open the convertible top lock. Be careful not
to damage the convertible top fabric. Re‐
move the convertible top tool.
4. On both sides of the vehicle, grasp the front
edge of the convertible top frame with one
Seite 47
Opening and closing Controls
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
hand. With the other hand, grasp the end of
the convertible top on the bottom edge.
Keep the convertible top well storage cover
open, e.g. with your shoulder.
5. Lift out the convertible top and the
convertible top ends on both sides simulta‐
neously and swing it forward. When you do
this, make sure that the convertible top ends
do not push against other parts.
6. With the cover ends placed high, close the
convertible top well storage cover.
7. Fold down the two convertible top ends on
the convertible top well storage cover.
Lock convertible cover
1.
Insert the cover tool on the front edge of the
convertible top frame into the convertible
top lock.
2. Turn the cover tool counterclockwise until
the front convertible top frame is locked with
the front windshield frame. Simultaneously,
have a second person push from the outside
toward the center on the front windshield
frame.
Seite 48
Controls Opening and closing
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
3. Insert the convertible top tool with the long
end into the adapter from the tool kit.
4. In the rear, raise the inner lining of the
convertible top. Place the adapter on the
red-marked pin of the convertible top mech‐
anism.
5. Push the rear convertible top end down and
simultaneously have a second person push
the tool all the way up to the stop.
In this way, the convertible top end is pushed
against the convertible top well storage
cover and locked.
Proceed accordingly on the other end of the
convertible top.
6. If possible, close the rear window electri‐
cally. The rear window cannot be manually
closed.
7. Have the convertible top checked by the
service center.
Wind deflector
The concept
The wind deflector reduces the air movement in
the passenger compartment when driving with
the top down.
Installation
1. Remove wind deflector from the protective
jacket and unfold it.
2. Press the upper and lower parts together
until the latch engages.
3. Push out the right retaining pin until the latch
engages and flip out the two rear retaining
pins.
Seite 49
Opening and closing Controls
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
4. Install the wind deflector on the vehicle with
the right retaining pin and the two rear ones
in the corresponding openings.
5. Push the left retaining pin into the provided
opening until it latches.
6. Flip up the top half of the wind deflector.
Do not tilt the front seat backrest too far
back
Do not tilt the front seat backrest too far back
with the wind deflector installed if the seat is to
be moved all the way back. Otherwise, the wind
deflector will be damaged.◀
Removing
Proceed in reverse sequence.
To release the two lateral retaining pins, pull the
corresponding handle forward a little and them
pull it to the side.
Folding up
On the left side, pull the handle of the retaining
pin on the wind deflector all the way back and
release the latch. Fold in top and bottom part.
Seite 50
Controls Opening and closing
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital con‐
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 54.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 55.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 98.
Seats
Adjusting
General information
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐
ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected
movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle con‐
trol could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the
rear
Also on the front passenger side, do not incline
the backrest on the front passenger side too far
to the rear during driving, or there is a risk of
slipping under the safety belt in the event of an
accident. This would eliminate the protection
normally provided by the belt.◀
At a glance
1 Active seat
2 Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory
3 Backrest width
4 Lumbar support
5 Backrest, head restraint
6 Shoulder support
7 Forward/back, height, tilt
8 Thigh support
Note
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for
the remote control currently in use. When the
vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the
position is automatically retrieved if the Func‐
tion, refer to page 36, for this is activated.
Adjustments in detail
1.
Forward/back.
Seite 51
Adjusting Controls
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
2. Height.
3. Seat tilt.
4. Backrest tilt.
Thigh support
Multifunctional seat
Adjust the position using the lever.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section of
the switch.
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
Change the width of the backrest
using the side wings to adjust the
lateral support.
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,
the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
Seite 52
Controls Adjusting
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Shoulder support
Also supports the back in the shoulder area:
▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.
▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.
Active seat
Active adjustment of the seat cushion's con‐
tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to
help prevent lower back pain.
Press the button. The LED lights up.
Front seat heating
Switching on
Press the button once for each temper‐
ature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 170, is activated,
the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Temperature distribution
The heating action in the seat cushion and back‐
rest can be distributed in different ways.
1.
"Climate"
2. "Seat heating distribution"
3. Select the required seat.
4. Turn the controller to set the temperature
distribution.
Active seat ventilation, front
The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are
cooled by means of integrated fans.
The ventilation rapidly cools the seat, e. g., if the
vehicle interior is overheated or for continuous
cooling at high temperatures.
Seite 53
Adjusting Controls
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Switching on
Press the button once for each ventila‐
tion level.
The highest level is active when three LEDs are
lit.
If when the seat ventilation is turned on the Max‐
imum Cooling function is activated, the seat
ventilation automatically switches to the highest
level. When the Maximum Cooling function is
switched off, the unit switches back to the pre‐
viously set level.
After a short time, the system automatically
moves down one level in order to prevent ex‐
cessive cooling.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Safety belts
Seats with safety belt
The vehicle has four seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Notes
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
One person per safety belt
Never allow more than one person to wear
a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small
children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
Putting on the belt
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low
around the hips in the lap area and does not
press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can
slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im‐
pact and injure the abdomen.
The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub
on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka‐
ble objects, or be pinched.◀
Reduction of restraining effect
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder
belt periodically to readjust the tension across
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the
safety belt may be reduced.◀
Buckling the belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the
belt buckle.
Unbuckling the belt
1.
Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
Seite 54
Controls Adjusting
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and front passenger seat
The indicator lamp flashes or lights up
and a signal sounds. Make sure that the
safety belts are positioned correctly.
The safety belt reminder is active at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac‐
tivated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
senger seat.
Damage to safety belts
In the case of strain caused by accidents or
damage:
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
Checking and replacing safety belts
Have the work performed only by your
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
that this safety feature will function properly.◀
Head restraints (front)
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of
an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐
proximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Active head restraint
In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain
severity, the active head restraint automatically
reduces the distance from the head.
Reduced protective function
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint cov‐
ers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
on the head restraints.
▷ Only attach accessories approved by BMW
to the seat or head restraint.
Otherwise, the protective function of the active
head restraint will be impaired and the personal
safety of the occupants will be endangered.◀
Adjusting the height
Adjusting electrically.
Distance to the back of the head
▷ Forward: pull.
▷ Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
Seite 55
Adjusting Controls
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Adjusting the side extensions
Fold forward for increased lateral support in the
resting position.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Entering the rear
Note
Folding back and locking the backrest
Before driving away, fold back and lock the
backrests; otherwise, an unexpected seat
movement may cause an accident.◀
Unlocking the backrest
1.
Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold backrest forward.
Changing the seat position
Requirements
▷ Vehicle at a standstill.
▷ When the door is open, the seat is accessi‐
ble from the side on which the door is open.
Controls
▷ Press and hold the button until the seat has
moved to the desired position. Releasing
the button stops the motion.
▷ Press the button briefly. The seat automat‐
ically moves to the respective end position.
Pressing again stops the motion.
Folding back and locking the backrest
After entering the rear, fold the backrest back
and lock it.
Press the button. The seat moves to its
original position. Pressing again stops the
motion.
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory
General information
Seite 56
Controls Adjusting
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror, and
steering wheel positions can be stored and re‐
trieved for each remote control. The adjustment
of the lumbar support is not stored.
Storing
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3. Press the button. The LED in the
button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED
goes out.
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Press the button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
Do not retrieve the memory while driving
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat
or steering wheel could result in an accident.◀
Comfort function
1.
Open the driver's door.
2. Switch off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Safety mode
1.
Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
nition.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until
the adjustment procedure is completed.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, the calling up of stored seat
positions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open or close the door or trunk lid.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
At a glance
1 Adjusting
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Fold in and out
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more curved
than the driver's side mirror.
Estimating distances correctly
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you see
in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an
accident.◀
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the
mirror setting is stored for the remote control in
use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote
control, the position is automatically retrieved if
the setting for this function is active.
Seite 57
Adjusting Controls
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the mirror changeover switch.
Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direction
in which the button is pressed.
Saving positions
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 56.
Adjusting manually
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass.
Automatic Curb Monitor
When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
senger side. This improves your view of the curb
and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for
example.
Activating
1.
Slide the mirror changeover switch
to the driver's side mirror position.
2. Engage transmission position R.
Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger's side mirror position.
Fold in and out
Press the button.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
▷ In car washes.
▷ In narrow streets.
▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the
button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐
pending on the width of the vehicle.◀
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
Both exterior mirrors are automatically dimmed.
Photocells are used for control in the Interior rear
view mirror, refer to page 58.
Interior rearview mirror, automatic
dimming feature
The concept
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirement
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Seite 58
Controls Adjusting
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Steering wheel
General information
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
Adjusting
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐
rections.
Storing the position
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 56.
Assistance getting in and out
The steering wheel temporarily moves into the
highest position to make it easier to enter and
exit the vehicle.
Steering wheel heating
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 59
Adjusting Controls
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
The right place for children
Note
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the
doors.◀
Children should always be in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat.
Transporting children in the rear
Only transport children younger than
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the
rear in child restraint fixing systems provided in
accordance with the age, weight and size of the
child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of in‐
jury in an accident.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
fixing system can no longer be used, due to their
age, weight and size.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint fixing system in the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
on the front passenger side are deactivated. Au‐
tomatic deactivation of front passenger airbags,
refer to page 99.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury to the child when the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.◀
Installing child restraint fixing
systems
Notes
Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint fixing systems
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
systems, observe the information provided by
the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
tective effect can be impaired.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
After installing a child restraint fixing system in
the front passenger seat, make sure that the
front, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐
senger side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto‐
matically, refer to page 99
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury to the child when the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.◀
Seite 60
Controls Transporting children safely
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and adjust its height to the highest po‐
sition to obtain the best possible position for the
belt and to offer optimal protection in the event
of an accident.
Do not change the seat position and height after
this.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint fixing system in the front passen‐
ger seat, open the backrest width completely.
Do not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Backrest width for the child seat
Before installing a child restraint fixing
system in the front passenger seat, the backrest
width must be opened completely. Do not
change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the
stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be locked against pulling out for
mounting the child restraint fixing systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the belt webbing completely.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with
the belt.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
Note
Manufacturer's information for LATCH
child restraint fixing systems
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing systems, observe the operating and safety
information from the system manufacturer; oth‐
erwise, the level of protection may be reduced.◀
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint fix‐
ing system is resting snugly against the back‐
rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered
may be reduced.◀
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing system, pull the belt away from the child re‐
straint fixing system.
Seite 61
Transporting children safely Controls
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐
cated in the gap between the seat and backrest.
Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing
systems
1.
Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer
to the operating instructions of the system.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap
For Canadian customers Only
The following statement is required by Trans‐
port Canada:
This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready
tether anchorages. As such neither a child re‐
straint system, nor a booster cushion, requirer‐
ing the use of a tether strap can be properly se‐
cured in the vehicle.
Seite 62
Controls Transporting children safely
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Driving
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Start/Stop button
The concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off and
starts the engine.
Automatic transmission: The en‐
gine starts if the brake is de‐
pressed while pressing the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: the engine starts if the
clutch pedal is depressed when the Start/Stop
button is pressed.
Ignition on
Automatic transmission: Press the Start/Stop
button but do not depress the brake.
Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/Stop
button, and do not press on the clutch pedal at
the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of
time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
The ignition switches off automatically:
▷ When the vehicle is locked, if the low beams
are switched on.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
▷ If the engine is switched off and the ignition
is switched on, the system automatically
switches to the radio ready state when the
door is opened if the lights are switched off
or the daytime running lights are switched
on.
Ignition off
Automatic transmission: Press the Start/Stop
button again, but do not depress the brake.
Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/Stop
button again, and do not press on the clutch
pedal at the same time.
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Transmission position P with the ignition
off
When the ignition is switched off, position P is
engaged automatically. When in an automatic
car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is
not switched off accidentally.◀
Ignition automatically cuts off while the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is stopped:
▷ During locking, also with the low beams ac‐
tivated.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started. This function is only available when
the low beams are switched off.
▷ When opening and closing the driver door, if
the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
low beams are switched off.
Seite 63
Driving Controls
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
▷ While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, if
the driver's door is open and the low beams
are switched off.
When the ignition is switched off, by opening or
closing the driver's door or unbuckling the driv‐
er's seat belt, the radio ready state remains ac‐
tive.
Radio ready state
Activate radio ready state:
▷ When the ignition is switched off: press ON/
OFF button on the radio.
▷ When the engine is running: press the Start/
Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power consumers re‐
main ready for operation.
Radio ready state switches off automatically:
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
Starting the engine
General information
Enclosed areas
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes
may lead to loss of consciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an
odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀
Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with
the engine running; doing so poses a risk of dan‐
ger.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐
mission in position P or neutral to prevent the
vehicle from moving.◀
Repeated starting in quick succession
Avoid repeated unsuccessful attempts to
start the vehicle or starting the vehicle several
times in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is
not burned or is inadequately burned, posing a
risk of overheating and damage to the catalytic
converter.◀
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at mod‐
erate engine speeds.
Manual transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch and shift to neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐
tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Automatic transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐
tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Engine stop
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot start the engine.◀
Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
Seite 64
Controls Driving
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
and downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐
cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb. ◀
Before driving into a car wash
In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a car
wash, heed the information regarding Washing
in automatic car washes, refer to page 210.
Manual transmission
Switching off the engine
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Automatic transmission
Switching off the engine
1.
Engage transmission position P with the ve‐
hicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, e.g., in a traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
engine starts again automatically for driving off.
Certain vehicle components may experience
additional wear as a result of this system.
Automatic mode
The Auto Start/Stop function is operational after
each engine start.
This function is activated at speeds faster than
about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.
Engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically during
a stop under the following conditions:
Automatic transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in transmission position
D.
▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the
vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by
Automatic Hold.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
The air flow of the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The display indicates that the
Auto Start/Stop function is ready
for an automatic engine start.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been satisfied.
Note
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ External temperature below approx.
+37 ℉/+3 ℃.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The passenger compartment has not yet
been heated or cooled to the required level.
▷ The engine is not yet at operating tempera‐
ture.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐
ing wheel is being turned.
Seite 65
Driving Controls
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the automatic
climate control is switched on.
▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▷ HDC is activated.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ The transmission selector lever is in position
N or S/M.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ Manual transmission:
The clutch pedal is pressed.
▷ Automatic transmission:
By releasing the brake pedal.
When Automatic Hold is activated: press the
accelerator.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of the
following conditions are met.
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lamps light up for varying
lengths of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
Note
Even if driving away was not intended, the de‐
activated engine starts up automatically in the
following situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the passenger com‐
partment when the cooling function is
switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
position is changed from D to N, R, or M/S.
▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
position is changed from P to N, D, R, or M/
S.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the automatic
climate control is switched on.
▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low.
▷ Excessive cooling of the passenger com‐
partment when the heating is switched on.
Preventing an automatic engine stop
with automatic transmission
The concept
To make it possible to drive away very quickly,
such as at an intersection, the automatic engine
stop can be actively prevented.
Preventing an engine stop using the
brake pedal
The engine stop can be actively prevented
within one second after the vehicle comes to a
standstill.
▷ Immediately after the vehicle comes to a
standstill, briefly press the brake pedal
forcefully.
▷ Then press the brake pedal with normal
braking force.
Seite 66
Controls Driving
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Using the button
Press the button.
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is
activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e.g., when
leaving it.
1.
Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
Automatic transmission: the transmission
position P is engaged automatically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐
sons, such as when the driver is detected to be
absent.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches of the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked.
Parking brake
The concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
from rolling when it is parked.
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models
Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐
cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb. ◀
While driving
Use while driving serves as an emergency brak‐
ing function:
Seite 67
Driving Controls
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the button is being pulled.
The indicator lamp lights up red, a signal
sounds and the brake lamps light up.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models.
If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx.
2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set.
Releasing
With the ignition switched on:
Manual transmission: Press the switch
while the brake or clutch is pressed.
Automatic transmission: Press the switch while
the brake is pressed or transmission position P
is engaged.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic Release
For automatic release, operate the accelerator
pedal.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
Subject to the following requirements, the park‐
ing brake is automatically released by operation
of the accelerator pedal:
▷ Engine on.
▷ Drive position engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
Inadvertent operation of the accelerator
pedal
Make sure that the accelerator pedal is not op‐
erated unintentionally; otherwise, the vehicle is
set in motion and there is a risk of an accident.◀
Automatic Hold
The concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving away.
For your safety
Under the following conditions, Automatic Hold
is automatically deactivated and the parking
brake is set:
▷ The engine is switched off.
▷ A door is opened and driver's safety belt is
unbuckled while the vehicle is stationary.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill
using the parking brake.
The indicator lamp switches from green
to red and the letters AUTO H go out.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models.
Leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
mission and ensure that the parking brake is set.
Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
Seite 68
Controls Driving
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Activating
This function can be activated when the driver's
door is closed and the safety belt is fastened,
and while driving.
Press the button.
The LED and the letters AUTO H light
up.
The indicator lamp lights up.
Automatic Hold is activated.
Deactivating
Press the button again.
The LED and the letters AUTO H go
out.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
When the parking brake is set manually, Auto‐
matic Hold is deactivated automatically.
Driving
Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is auto‐
matically secured against rolling after braking to
a standstill.
The indicator lamp lights up green.
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive
off.
The brake is released automatically.
The indicator lamp goes out.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models
Before driving into a car wash
Deactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the
parking brake will be set when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary and the vehicle will no longer be able to
roll.◀
Parking
The parking brake is automatically set if the en‐
gine is switched off while the vehicle is being
held by Automatic Hold.
The indicator lamp changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set if the engine
is switched off while the vehicle is coast‐
ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐
vated.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models
Automatic Hold remains activated during an en‐
gine stop brought about by the Auto Start/Stop
function.
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot release the parking brake.◀
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling
using a wheel chock, for example, when leaving
it.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlamp flasher
Turn signal
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
Seite 69
Driving Controls
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
To switch off manually, press the lever to the re‐
sistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in‐
dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
High beams, headlamp flasher
▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do not switch on the wipers if they are fro‐
zen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper
blades and the windshield wiper motor may be
damaged.◀
No wiper operation on dry windshield
Do not use the windshield wipers if the
windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper
blades or cause them to become worn more
quickly.◀
Switching on
Press the wiper levers up.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Normal wiping speed: press up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press
once beyond the resistance point.
The wipers switch to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Seite 70
Controls Driving
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the wiper levers down.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Rain sensor
The concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐
ror.
Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever.
The LED in the steering column stalk lights up.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise, dam‐
age could be caused by undesired wiper activa‐
tion.◀
Rain sensor, sensitivity
Turn the thumbwheel.
Clean the windshield, headlamps
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regular
intervals when the vehicle lights are switched
on.
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
reason, use antifreeze.
Seite 71
Driving Controls
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.◀
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example.
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐
shield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of
resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds,
until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical
position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
system must be reactivated.
Fold the wipers back down
Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise,
the wipers may become damaged when they are
switched on.◀
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers
move to their resting position and are ready
for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep
it away from sources of ignition.
Only keep it in the closed original container and
inaccessible to children.
Follow the instructions on the container.◀
Washer fluid reservoir
Adding washer fluid
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to
avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot
engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's rec‐
ommendations.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
the correct mixing ratio.
For the capacity, refer to technical data.
Manual transmission
Shifting
Shifting into 5th or 6th gear
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push
the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inad‐
vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could
lead to engine damage.◀
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. When
the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight
resistance needs to be overcome.
Seite 72
Controls Driving
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
Transmission positions
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
ward gears are available.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The
vehicle can roll.
When the ignition is switched off, refer to
page 63, position P is engaged automatically.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
▷ After the engine is switched off when the
vehicle is in radio ready state, refer to
page 64, or when the ignition is switched off,
refer to page 63, and when position R or D is
engaged.
▷ With the ignition is off, if position N is en‐
gaged.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's
door is opened, and the brake pedal is not
pressed while the vehicle is stationary and
transmission position R or D is engaged.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that posi‐
tion P of the automatic transmission is engaged.
Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the gas pedal beyond the
resistance point at the full throttle position.
Engaging the transmission position
▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐
gaged if the engine is running and the brake
pedal is pressed.
▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.
Depress the brake until you start driv‐
ing
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a driving position, maintain pres‐
sure on the brake pedal until you are ready
to start.◀
Engaging D, R and N
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its
center position.
Press unlock button, in order to:
▷ Engage R.
▷ Shift out of P.
Seite 73
Driving Controls
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Engaging P
Press button P.
Sport program DS and manual mode M/
S
Activating the sport program
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
Activating the M/S manual mode
1.
Push the selector lever to the left out of
transmission position D.
2. Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, e.g., M1.
Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S
manual mode is automatically upshifted as
needed.
Switching to manual mode
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐
sible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Sport automatic transmission: prevent
automatic upshifting in M/S manual
mode
For vehicles with Sport automatic transmis‐
sions, automatic shift operations are not per‐
formed, at maximum engine speed for example,
if one of the following conditions is met:
▷ DSC deactivated.
▷ TRACTION activated.
▷ SPORT+ activated.
In addition, the kickdown is deactivated.
Ending the sport program/manual
mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles for Sport automatic
transmission
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
Seite 74
Controls Driving
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the trans‐
mission temporarily switches to manual mode.
If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle
is not accelerated for a certain time, the system
switches back into automatic mode if the selec‐
tor lever is in transmission position D.
▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate
engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift
down if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The transmission position is dis‐
played, e.g.: P.
Seite 75
Driving Controls
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Displays
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 83
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator/warning lamps 80
4 Tachometer 83
5 Oil temperature 83
6 Electronic displays 77
7 Reset miles 83
Seite 76
Controls Displays
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Electronic displays
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Messages, e.g. Check Control 80
Time 83
Date 83
2 Range 84
3 Computer 87
Speed limit detection 85
4 Navigation display, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
Service requirements 84
Miles/trip miles 83
5 Selection list, such as for the radio 87
Current fuel consumption 84
Energy recovery 84
External temperature 83
Transmission display 75
Multifunctional instrument
display
The concept
The instrument dispaly is a variable display.
When the driving mode is changed, the appear‐
ance is changed to reflect the new driving mode.
The change of appearance can be deactivated
in the Control Display.
Some of the displays in the instrument display
may differ from the way they are shown in this
owner's manual.
Seite 77
Displays Controls
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
At a glance
1 Fuel gauge 83
2 Indicator/warning lamps 80
3 Speedometer
4 Variable displays
5 Tachometer 83
Selection lists 87
ECO PRO displays 170
6 Oil temperature 83
7 Computer 87
8 Reset miles 83
Switching the change of display on and off
You can set whether the instrument display
changes to the ECO PRO displays or Sport dis‐
plays automatically when you switch driving
modes.
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "ECO PRO Info"
Seite 78
Controls Displays
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
ECO PRO displays
1 Speedometer
2 Variable displays: ECO PRO Tips, Deceler‐
ation assistant instructions, Driver assist
system displays
3 Efficiency display 170
4 Transmission display 75
5 ▷ Blue: bonus range
▷ Gray: range
In ECO PRO driving mode, the instrument dis‐
play switches to the ECO PRO displays. This
display supports a driving style that saves on
fuel consumption with more prominent repre‐
sentation of the efficiency display and various
ECO PRO tips.
Seite 79
Displays Controls
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Sport displays
1 Speedometer
2 Tachometer
3 Transmission display 75
4 Variable displays
In the Sport and Sport+ modes, the instrument
display switches to the sport displays. This dis‐
play supports a sporty driving style with more
prominent representation of the tachometer,
the transmission displays, and the vehicle
speed.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lamps and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and
a text message may appear on the Control Dis‐
play.
Indicator/warning lamps
Instrument cluster
Seite 80
Controls Displays
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Instrument display
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Overview: indicator/warning lamps
Symbol Function or system
Turn signal
Parking brake
Parking brake in Canadian models
Automatic Hold
Front fog lamps
High beams
High-beam Assistant
Parking lamps, headlamp control
Symbol Function or system
Active Cruise Control
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise
Control
Cruise control
Lane departure warning
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
DSC Dynamic Stability Control or
DTC Dynamic Traction Control
Tire Pressure Monitor
Flat Tire Monitor
Safety belts
Airbag system
Steering system
Emissions
Emissions in Canadian models
Brake system
Brake system in Canadian models
Seite 81
Displays Controls
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Symbol Function or system
ABS Antilock Brake System
ABS Antilock Brake System in Cana‐
dian models
At least one Check Control message
is displayed or is stored
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol in
the instrument cluster explain a Check Control
message and the meaning of the indicator and
warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
Addition information, such as on the cause of a
fault or the required action, can be called up via
Check Control.
The supplementary text of urgent messages is
displayed on the Control Display automatically.
Symbols
Depending on the Check Control message, the
following functions can be selected.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the integrated
owner's manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact the service partner.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the computer button on the turn signal
lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared un‐
til the malfunction is eliminated. If several
malfunctions occur at once, the messages
are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed again
later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages that are displayed during
driving are displayed again after the ignition is
switched off.
Seite 82
Controls Displays
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Fuel gauge
The vehicle inclination may
cause the display to vary.
Notes on refueling, refer to
page 176.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted
to protect the engine.
Engine oil temperature
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine and
vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the mid‐
dle or in the left half of the
temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐
perature end. A Check Control message is
displayed in addition.
Coolant temperature
If the coolant along with the engine becomes too
hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 194.
Odometer and trip odometer
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Display/reset miles
Press the knob.
▷ When the ignition is switched
off, the time, external temper‐
ature and odometer are dis‐
played.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
External temperature
External temperature warning
If the indicator drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal sounds.
A Check Control message is dis‐
played.
There is an increased risk of ice
on roads.
Ice on roads
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃,
there can be a risk of ice on roads.
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shaded
roads, for example, to avoid the increased risk of
an accident.◀
Time
The time is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
Setting the time and time format,
refer to page 90.
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Setting the date and date format,
refer to page 90.
Seite 83
Displays Controls
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Range
After the reserve range is
reached:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the onboard com‐
puter.
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such
as when cornering quickly, operation of the
engine is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not
ensured and damage may occur.◀
Displaying the cruising range
1.
"Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Additional indicators"
The range is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Range when destination guidance is
activated in the navigation system
When destination guidance is ac‐
tivated in the navigation system,
the range up to the destination is
displayed.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. You can check
whether you are currently driving
in an efficient and environmen‐
tally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Additional indicators"
The bar display for the current fuel consumption
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Energy recovery
The kinetic energy of the vehicle
is converted to electrical energy
while coasting. The vehicle bat‐
tery is partially charged and fuel
consumption can be reduced.
Service requirements
Display
The driving distance or the time
to the next scheduled mainte‐
nance is displayed briefly after
the ignition is switched on.
The current service require‐
ments can be read out from the remote control
by the service specialist.
With TeleService, data regarding the service
status or legally mandated inspections of your
vehicle are automatically transmitted to your
service center before the service due date.
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Display.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Seite 84
Controls Displays
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a le‐
gally mandated inspection is
approaching.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set
correctly.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Adjust the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally man‐
dated inspections of the vehicle are automati‐
cally transmitted to your service center before a
service due date.
You can check when your service center was
notified.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Gear shift indicator
The concept
The system recommends the most fuel efficient
gear in the current driving situation.
Displays
Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Symbols Description
Fuel efficient gear is engaged.
Shift up to fuel efficient gear.
Shift down to fuel efficient gear.
Shift into neutral.
Speed limit detection with No
Passing Information
The concept
Speed limit detection
Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the
shape of a traffic sign to display the currently
detected speed limit. The camera at the base of
the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs
at the edge of the road as well as variable over‐
head sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols
for wet road conditions, etc. are also detected
and compared with vehicle interior data, such as
for the rain sensor, and are displayed depending
on the situation. The system takes into account
Seite 85
Displays Controls
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
the information stored in the navigation system
and also displays speed limits present on routes
without signs.
No Passing Information
No Passing Information displays in the instru‐
ment cluster the beginnings and ends of no
passing zones detected by the camera. The sys‐
tem accounts for only the beginnings and ends
of No Passing zones marked by signs.
No display is shown:
▷ In countries where No Passing zones are
primarily identified with road markings.
▷ On routes without signage.
▷ Where there are railroad crossings, highway
markings or other situations where no sig‐
nage is present, but passing would not be
permitted.
Notes
Personal judgment
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic
situation.
The system assists the driver and does not re‐
place the human eye.◀
At a glance
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the mir‐
ror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Speed limit information"
If speed limit detection is switched on, it can be
displayed on the info display in the instrument
cluster via the onboard computer. No Passing
Information is displayed together with activated
speed limit information.
Display
The following is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Speed limit detection
Current speed limit.
Speed limit detection is not avail‐
able.
Speed limit detection can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
No Passing Information
▷ Start of No Passing zone.
▷ End of No Passing zone.
▷ No Passing Information not
available.
No Passing Information can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
Seite 86
Controls Displays
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and may
provide incorrect information in the following
situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are concealed by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered by a sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
as due to changes in the road network.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed
sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
Selection lists in the
instrument cluster
The concept
The following can be operated using the buttons
and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial on telephone.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the
thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list.
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐
ting and confirm it by pressing the thumbwheel.
Computer
Indication in the info display
The information from the on‐
board computer is shown in the
info display in the instrument
cluster.
Seite 87
Displays Controls
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Calling up information on the info
display
Press the onboard computer button on the turn
signal lever.
Information is displayed on the info display of the
instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig‐
nal lever calls up the following information on the
info display:
▷ Range.
▷ Average fuel consumption.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Speed limit detection.
▷ Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Arrow view of navigation system.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
When the arrow view in the Head-up Display
is inactive.
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
Adjusting the info display
You can select what information from the on‐
board computer is to be displayed on the info
display of the instrument cluster.
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. Select the desired displays.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km. If there is only enough
fuel left for less than 45 miles/80 km, the color
of the display changes.
Average fuel consumption
This is calculated for the period during which the
engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated on
the basis of various distances.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped do not enter into the
calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold the computer button on the turn
signal lever.
Distance to destination
The distance remaining to the destination is dis‐
played if a destination is entered in the naviga‐
tion system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
Seite 88
Controls Displays
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is
displayed if a destination is en‐
tered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed limit detection
Description of the speed limit detection, refer to
page 85, function.
Speed limit
Display of a speed limit which, when reached,
should cause a warning to be issued.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed limit once by at least
3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the controller.
Setting your current speed as the limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
limit.
Trip computer
The vehicle features two types of computer.
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an over‐
view of the current trip.
Resetting the trip computer
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a
standstill.
Display on the Control Display
Display the onboard computer or trip computer
on the Control Display.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Seite 89
Displays Controls
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Resetting the fuel consumption or
speed
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Cons." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Settings on the Control
Display
Time
Setting the time zone
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone"
4. Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Setting the time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed.
7. Press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Date
Setting the date
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Seite 90
Controls Displays
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Setting the date format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Language
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Units of measure
Setting the units of measure
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/dis‐
tance and temperature:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Brightness
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the controller.
Seite 91
Displays Controls
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness control may not be clearly visible.
Seite 92
Controls Displays
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Lamps
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
At a glance
1 Rear fog lamps
2 Front fog lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive Light
Control, High-beam Assistant, Welcome
lamps, Daytime running lights
4 Lamps off, daytime running lights
5 Parking lamps, daytime running lights
6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam
Assistant
7 Instrument lighting
Parking lamps/low beams,
headlamp control
General information
Switch position: 0, ,
If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off at these switch settings.
Parking lamps
Switch position : the vehicle lamps light
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged and it would then be impossible to start
the engine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 94.
Low beams
Switch position with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
position or : the parking and interior
lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Activating/deactivating
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome light"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Seite 93
Lamps Controls
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Headlamp courtesy delay feature
The low beams stay lit for a short while after the
ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched
off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.
Setting the duration
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway light.: s"
4. Set the duration.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Automatic headlamp control
Switch position : the low beams are switched
on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twi‐
light or if there is precipitation. The indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams always stay on when the fog
lamps are switched on.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judgment
in determining when the lamps should be
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually un‐
der these conditions.◀
Daytime running lights
With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐
ning lights light up in position 0,
or .
After the ignition is switched off, the parking
lamps light up in position .
Activating/deactivating
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Roadside parking lamps
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Seite 94
Controls Lamps
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Adaptive light control
The concept
Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
the course of the road.
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating
lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
Activating
Switch position
with the ignition switched
on.
The turning lamps are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Light Control does not swivel to the driver's side
when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp is
active.
Self-leveling headlights
The self-leveling headlights feature adapts the
light distribution to the contours of the road.
The light distribution is lowered on hilltops to
avoid blinding oncoming traffic and tilted in de‐
pressions to increase visibility.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
High-beam Assistant
The concept
When the low beams are switched on, this sys‐
tem automatically switches the high beams on
and off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor
on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The
assistant ensures that the high beams are
switched on whenever the traffic situation al‐
lows. The driver can intervene at any time and
switch the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating
1.
Turn the light switch to or .
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, ar‐
row.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
When the lights are switched on, the
high beams are switched on and off automati‐
cally.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad‐
equate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
Seite 95
Lamps Controls
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off
when manually adjusting the light. To reactivate
the High-beam Assistant, press the button on
the turn signal lever.
System limits
Personal responsibility
The high-beam assistant cannot serve as
a substitute for the driver's personal judgment
of when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
ually switch off the high beams in situations
where this is required to avoid a safety risk.◀
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on freeways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ At low speeds.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the mir‐
ror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Fog lamps
Front fog lamps
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on.
Press the button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
page 94, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the front
fog lamps.
Instrument lighting
Adjusting
The parking lamps or low beams
must be switched on to adjust the
brightness.
Adjust the brightness using the
thumbwheel.
Seite 96
Controls Lamps
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Interior lamps
General information
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps
and courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐
cally.
The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐
enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting.
1 Interior lamps
2 Reading lamp
Switching the interior lamps on and off
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Reading lamps
Press the button.
When the interior lamps are switched off per‐
manently, the reading lamps cannot be switched
on.
Bang & Olufsen High End Surround
Sound System
Adjusting speaker lighting
All speakers in the vehicle are illuminated. The
lighting can be individually set.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Bang & Olufsen"
4. Select the desired lighting setting.
▷ "Off": no lighting.
▷ "Reduced": all speakers in the field of
view are hidden while driving.
▷ "On": all speakers are always illumi‐
nated.
Seite 97
Lamps Controls
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Safety
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Side airbag
4 Knee airbags
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint.
Side airbags
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest, lap, and head area.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on how to ensure the optimal
protective effect of the airbags
Seite 98
Controls Safety
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the danger of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible if the airbag is triggered.
▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐
jects between an airbag and a person.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover
with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not
attach holders such as for navigation instru‐
ments and mobile phones.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can
occur if the front airbag is triggered.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
ets, over the backrests.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag; otherwise, inju‐
ries can occur if the airbags are deployed.
▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, cover them or modify
them in any way.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the
dashboard, and the seats.◀
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive individuals.
In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
and after triggering of the airbags
Do not touch the individual components imme‐
diately after the system has been triggered; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of burns.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
your service center or a workshop that has the
necessary authorization for handling explosives.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un‐
desired triggering of the airbag, either of which
could result in injury.◀
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
When the ignition is switch on, the warn‐
ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up briefly and thereby indicates the op‐
erational readiness of the entire airbag system
and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
When there is a malfunction, have the air‐
bag system checked immediately
When there is a malfunction, have the airbag
system checked immediately; otherwise, there
is a risk that the system does not function as ex‐
pected in the event of an accident despite cor‐
responding severity of the accident.◀
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
The system determines whether the front pas‐
senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐
sistance of the human body.
Seite 99
Safety Controls
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
The front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger side are activated or deactivated ac‐
cordingly.
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front
passenger airbags may not function properly.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front
passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, see the safety notes and instructions
under Children on the front passenger seat.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults, the
front passenger airbags may be deactivated in
certain sitting positions. In this case, the indica‐
tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights
up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To make sure that the occupied seat cushion
can be evaluated correctly
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically recommended by
the manufacturer of your vehicle.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
Indicator lamp for the front passenger
airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags indicates the operating state of the front
passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐
tivated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child who is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system intended for that
purpose is detected on the
seat or the seat is empty. The
airbags on the front passen‐
ger side are not activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
Detected child seats
The system generally detects children seated in
a child seat, especially in the child seats that
were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was
manufactured. After installing a child seat, make
sure that the indicator lamp for the front pas‐
senger airbags lights up. This indicates that the
child seat has been detected and the front pas‐
senger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front
passenger airbag
The strength with which the driver's and front
passenger airbags are triggered depends on the
Seite 100
Controls Safety
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
position of the driver's and front passenger
seats.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a
corresponding message appears on the Control
Display.
Calibrating the front seats
A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
1. Move the respective seat forward all the
way.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. It
moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a repeat
calibration, have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Unobstructed area of movement
Ensure that the area of movement of the
seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or
damage to objects.◀
Rollover protection system
The concept
The rollover protection system is automatically
activated in the event of a sufficiently serious
accident or if the longitudinal axis is tilted ex‐
cessively. The safety frames located behind the
rear headrests extend within fractions of a sec‐
ond.
Supplementing the reinforced front windshield
frame, the rollover protection system further in‐
creases passenger safety.
Maintaining movement space
Always keep the movement space of the
rollover protection system clear. Otherwise,
there may be damage or injuries when the roll‐
over protection system is triggered.◀
Triggered rollover protection system
After deployment or damage
After deployment of the rollover protec‐
tion system or in the event of damage, have the
system checked and replaced.
Have this work performed only by your service
center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured that this
safety feature will function properly.◀
Do not move convertible top
When the rollover protection system is ex‐
tended, do not move the convertible top. Oth‐
erwise, damages or injuries may result.◀
If the rollover protection system was not placed
under any stress after an automatic triggering, it
can be pushed back by hand, e.g. to close the
convertible top. Three people are necessary for
this.
1.
Push the lever to the side and hold it in this
position.
2. Push down the safety frame.
3. Release lever.
4. Hold down the safety frame.
5. Proceed likewise with the second safety
frame.
6. Close the convertible top
Seite 101
Safety Controls
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation
or after deployment
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the system scrapped by your serv‐
ice center. Non-professional attempts to service
the system could lead to failure in an emergency
or undesired triggering of the airbag, either of
which could result in injury.◀
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed
when there is a malfunction.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept
The tire inflation pressure is measured in the
four mounted tires. The system notifies you if
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
more tires.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset when the in‐
flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable
signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Always use
wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the
system will operate properly. Reset the system
after each correction of the tire inflation pres‐
sure and after every tire or wheel change.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
vance.◀
The system does not operate correctly if it has
not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
indicated despite correct tire inflation pres‐
sures.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire:
▷ For a mounted wheel without TPM electron‐
ics.
▷ When the TPM is disturbed by other sys‐
tems or devices with the same radio fre‐
quency.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM can be displayed on the Control Display,
e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"
The status is displayed.
Status display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
A change in the tire inflation pressure during
driving is taken into account.
A correction is only necessary if this is indicated
by the TPM
Wheels, green
The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target
state.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
▷ A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure
in several tires.
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus warns based on the infla‐
tion pressures initialized last.
▷ A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys‐
tem is being reset.
Seite 102
Controls Safety
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for
this may be:
▷ TPM is being reset.
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency.
▷ Malfunction.
For Canadian models: additional
information
The status display additionally shows the cur‐
rent tire inflation pressures and tire tempera‐
tures.
When correcting the tire inflation pressures,
note the following:
The tire pressure increases as the tire temper‐
ature increases.
Therefore, only correct the tire inflation pres‐
sure when the tire is at the ambient temperature.
Compare the displayed tire temperature with
the external temperature in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Resetting the system
Reset the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset".
6. Drive away.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After driving for a few minutes, the set tire infla‐
tion pressures are applied as set values. The re‐
setting process is completed automatically dur‐
ing driving. The tires are shown in green and
"TPM active" is shown on the Control Display.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
drive away again, the process resumes auto‐
matically.
If a flat tire is detected during a reset, all tires are
displayed in yellow.
Low tire pressure message
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus warns based on the infla‐
tion pressures initialized last.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg‐
ular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 187, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec‐
essary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Seite 103
Safety Controls
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2. Rectify the flat tire.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In
this case, have the electronics checked at
the next opportunity and have them re‐
placed if necessary.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is approx.
50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance depends
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
erties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐
tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀
Message when the system was not
reset
A Check Control message is displayed.
The system detected a wheel change but was
not reset.
Warnings regarding the current tire inflation
pressure are not reliable.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
have the service center check it if necessary.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
your service center.
▷ TPM could not be fully reset. Reset the sys‐
tem again.
Seite 104
Controls Safety
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency: after leaving the area
of the disturbance, the system automatically
becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la‐
bel, you should determine the proper tire infla‐
tion pressure for those tires.) As an added safety
feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that il‐
luminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-in‐
flated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping
ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a sub‐
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not operating prop‐
erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com‐
bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then re‐
main continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal‐
function indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing
the rotational speeds of the individual wheels
while moving.
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and
therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when the
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. In‐
itialize the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
vance.◀
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires can‐
not be detected. Therefore, check the tire infla‐
tion pressure regularly.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
Seite 105
Safety Controls
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
whether or not the FTM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set inflation
tire pressures as reference values for the detec‐
tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization with "Reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation
pressure.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg‐
ular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 187, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if necessary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2. Rectify the flat tire.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Seite 106
Controls Safety
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is approx.
50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance depends
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
erties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐
tinue driving, and contact your service center.◀
Collision warning
The concept
If the vehicle does not include Active Cruise
Control with Stop & Go, the collision warning is
controlled via the camera in the base of the in‐
terior rearview mirror.
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
danger of collision at speeds above approx.
10 mph/15 km/h. The time of these warnings
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
In the process, vehicles in a similar direction of
movement are observed if they are located
within the detection range of the system.
When the vehicle is intentionally brought into
contact with a vehicle, the collision warning is
delayed to avoid misleading warnings.
Warning stages
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for example, when there
is the impending danger of a collision or the dis‐
tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Seite 107
Safety Controls
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Acute warning
Warning of the imminent danger of a collision
when the vehicle approaches another vehicle at
a relatively high differential speed.
Switching the warning function on/off
Press the button
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via iDrive.
These settings have no effect on the time of the
warning with which Active Cruise Control ACC
prompts the driver to intervene or brake.
1.
Activate collision warning.
2. Activate the desired warning time on the
Control Display.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Display in the instrument cluster
The collision warning can be issued in the in‐
strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and
acoustically.
Warning stages
Symbol Measure
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
ing.
Increase distance.
The vehicle flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
ing.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The display does not relieve the driver of
the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
System limits
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready
to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an
accident occurring.◀
Detection range
The detection capacity of the camera and the
collision warning has limitations.
This may result in the warning not being issued
or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not be
detected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you
or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Seite 108
Controls Safety
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the camera view field or the front wind‐
shield are dirty or covered.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ In the case of vehicles with insufficiently visi‐
ble tail lamps.
▷ In the case of partially covered vehicles.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop knob.
▷ During the calibration process of the camera
immediately after vehicle shipment.
Prewarning sensitivity
Depending on the set prewarning time, this may
result in increased false warnings.
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the mir‐
ror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Collision warning with
braking function
The concept
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
Control with Stop & Go, the collision warning is
controlled via the cruise control radar sensor.
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
danger of collision at speeds above approx.
10 mph/15 km/h. The time of these warnings
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
The collision warning is available even if cruise
control has been deactivated.
It responds to moving objects that are within the
detection range of the radar system.
When the vehicle is intentionally brought into
contact with a vehicle, the collision warning is
delayed to avoid false warnings.
Switching on/off
Switching the warning function on/off
Press the button
Seite 109
Safety Controls
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via iDrive.
These settings have no effect on the time of the
warning with which Active Cruise Control ACC
prompts the driver to intervene or brake.
1. Activate collision warning.
2. Activate the desired warning time on the
Control Display.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Display
Warning stages
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for example, when there
is the impending danger of a collision or the dis‐
tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Acute warning with braking function
Warning of the imminent danger of a collision
when the vehicle approaches another object at
a relatively high differential speed.
The acute warning prompts the driver to inter‐
vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is
accompanied by a braking intervention.
The braking intervention is executed with lim‐
ited braking force and for a brief period only. The
intervention will not bring the vehicle to a com‐
plete standstill.
The braking intervention is executed only if DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The acute warning does not relieve the
driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her
driving speed and style to the traffic condi‐
tions.◀
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐
ing the steering wheel.
When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switch
off the collision warning with braking function to
prevent undesired interventions.
The braking function is deactivated if the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control or DTC Dynamic
Traction Control is deactivated.
Display in the instrument cluster
The collision warning can be issued in the in‐
strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and
acoustically.
Warning stages
Symbol Measure
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
ing.
Increase distance.
The vehicle flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
ing.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The display does not relieve the driver of
the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
Seite 110
Controls Safety
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
System limits
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready
to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an
accident occurring.◀
Detection range
The detection capacity of the radar sensor and
the collision warning has limitations.
This may result in the warning not being issued
or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not be
detected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you
or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ Pedestrians.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or obscured.
Prewarning sensitivity
Depending on the set prewarning time, this may
result in increased false warnings.
Night Vision with pedestrian
detection
The concept
Night Vision with pedestrian detection is a night
vision system.
An infrared camera records the area in front of
the vehicle and displays the image on the Con‐
trol Display.
The picture is a heat image. The system has an
integrated pedestrian detection function that
detects pedestrians and cyclists. Warm objects
that are similar in shape to human beings are
detected by the system.
Personal responsibility
Night Vision cannot replace the driver's
personal judgment of the visibility conditions
and the traffic situation. The view ahead and the
actual visibility conditions must always be the
basis on which the vehicle speed is adjusted;
otherwise, there is a risk to road safety.◀
Heat image
The image shows the heat radiated by objects
in the field of view of the camera.
Warm objects have a light appearance and cold
objects, a dark appearance.
The ability to detect an object depends on the
temperature difference between the object and
the background and on the level of heat radiation
emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in
temperature to the environment or that radiate
very little heat are difficult to detect.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient
light, the image is only displayed when the low
beams are switched on.
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for
a fraction of a second.
Seite 111
Safety Controls
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Pedestrian detection
The pedestrian detection and warning system
only operates in darkness and only when a heat
image is displayed.
Warm objects that are similar in shape to human
beings are detected by the system.
People detected by the system are displayed
with a slight yellow hue.
Under good ambient conditions, the pedestrian
detection system operates within a range of ap‐
prox. 50 ft/15 m to approx. 330 ft/100 m.
Environmental influences can limit the availabil‐
ity of pedestrian detection.
If pedestrian detection is not available, a symbol
is displayed in the heat image.
This symbol disappears when the function be‐
comes available again.
Warning of people in danger
If the system detects a person in a defined area
in front of the vehicle and if there is the danger
of collision with this person, a warning symbol
appears on the Control Display and in the Head-
up Display.
Although both the shape and the heat radiation
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out.
Warning area in front of the vehicle
The warning area in front of the vehicle is divided
into two areas.
▷ Central area 1 directly in front of the vehicle.
▷ Expanded area 2 to the right and left.
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
the direction of the steering angle and changes
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in‐
creases, the area becomes longer and wider, for
example.
Prewarning
The yellow symbol is displayed when a
person is detected in the central area,
Seite 112
Controls Safety
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
arrow 1, immediately in front of the vehicle.
The yellow symbol is displayed when a
person detected in the extended area,
arrow 2, is moving from the right or left
to the central area.
Acute warning
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
sounds. You are requested to intervene
immediately by braking or making an
evasive maneuver.
Display in the Head-up Display
The warning is displayed simultane‐
ously in the Head-Up Display and on the
Control Display. The displayed symbol
can vary with the people detected. For people
located in the central area, the distance to the
person is indicated by the size of the symbol.
System limits
Basic limits
System operation is limited in situations such as
the following:
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
▷ When the camera is dirty or the protective
glass is damaged.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ At very high external temperatures.
Limits of pedestrian detection
Animals are not detected by the pedestrian de‐
tection function, even if they are clearly visible in
the image.
Limited pedestrian detection:
▷ People who are fully or partially covered, es‐
pecially when their heads are covered.
▷ People who are not in an upright position,
e.g., lying down.
▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,
recumbent bicycles).
▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g.,
after an accident.
Activation/deactivation
Press the button.
Display
Adjustments via the iDrive
With Night Vision switched on:
1.
Activate Night Vision with pedestrian detec‐
tion.
2. Press the controller.
3. Open the desired menu item.
▷ "Brightness"
▷ "Contrast"
▷ "Pedestrian detection"
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Seite 113
Safety Controls
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Camera
Rain, dirt, snow, or ice can impair camera oper‐
ation.
The camera is automatically heated when the
external temperatures are low.
The camera is automatically cleaned together
with the headlamps.
Clean the lens, refer to page 214.
Lane departure warning
The concept
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane mark‐
ings is about to leave the lane. Depending on the
country-specific version of the vehicle, the
speed is between 35 mph/55 km/h and
45 mph/70 km/h. When switching on the system
below this speed, a message appears in the in‐
strument cluster.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in the
event of warnings. The time of the warning may
vary depending on the current driving situation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Notes
Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the course
of the road and the traffic situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering
wheel, as you may lose control of the vehicle.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Lane departure warning
Camera
The camera is located near the base of the mir‐
ror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Press the button
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Seite 114
Controls Safety
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Lines: system is activated.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be
issued.
Display in the instrument display
▷ Symbol red: system is activated.
▷ Symbol green: at least one lane
marking was detected and warnings
can be issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the lane,
a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning ends:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of worn, poorly visible, merging,
diverging, or multiple lane markings such as
in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by ob‐
jects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
Active Blind Spot Detection
The concept
Two radar sensors below the rear bumper mon‐
itor the area behind and next to the vehicle at
speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system indicates whether there are vehicles
in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from
behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights up
dimly.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐
tions described above.
The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror
flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.
Notes
Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic
situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehicle's
surroundings at all times, otherwise an accident
is still possible despite all warnings.◀
Seite 115
Safety Controls
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
At a glance
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located under the rear
bumper.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The system can issue warnings at speeds above
approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display
Information stage
The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi‐
cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot
or approaching from behind.
Warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes
brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the crit‐
ical zone.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
Seite 116
Controls Safety
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Brake force display
The concept
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lamps light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lamps light up in addition.
Seite 117
Safety Controls
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐
ing.
The vehicle remains steerable even during full
brake applications, thus increasing active
safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost. It thus helps to achieve the shortest
possible braking distance during full braking.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
Adaptive brake assistant
In combination with the Active Cruise Control,
this system ensures that the brakes respond
even more rapidly when braking in critical situa‐
tions. Refer also to Collision warning, refer to
page 109.
Drive-off assistant
This system supports driving away on gradients.
The parking brake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive away with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Driving off without delay
After releasing the foot brake, start driving
without delay, since the drive-off assistant will
not hold the vehicle in place for more than ap‐
prox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling
back.◀
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
when driving away and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject
to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle
on a steady course by reducing engine speed
and by applying brakes at individual wheels.
Adjust your driving style to the situation
An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
with DSC.
Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
margin by driving in a risky manner.◀
Seite 118
Controls Driving stability control systems
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
bends.
Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active
Steering system are only performed by the rear
axle steering.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed.
The DSC system is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
The concept
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which
forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum forward momen‐
tum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed
snowy roads, but driving stability is limited.
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
ate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un‐
der the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in
deep snow or on loose surfaces.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
provides maximum traction on loose ground.
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
Activating DTC
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed
in the tachometer.
Seite 119
Driving stability control systems Controls
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐
namic Traction Control is activated.
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
axles as demanded by the driving situation and
road surface.
HDC Hill Descent Control
The concept
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐
matically controls vehicle speed on steep down‐
hill gradients. Without applying the brakes, the
vehicle moves at slightly more than walking
speed.
Hill Descent Control can be activated at speeds
below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When driving
downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed to ap‐
prox. walking speed and then keeps its speed
constant.
As long as there is active braking, the system is
on standby. The system does not brake the ve‐
hicle during this time.
Use HDC in low gears or in transmission position
D or R only.
Increasing or decreasing vehicle speed
Specify desired speed in the range from approx.
4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/h using
the rocker switch of the cruise control on the
steering wheel. Vehicle speed can be changed
by lightly accelerating.
▷ Press up the rocker switch to the point of
resistance: the speed increases gradually.
▷ Press up the rocker switch past the point of
resistance: the speed increases while the
rocker switch is pressed.
▷ Press down the rocker switch to the point of
resistance: the speed decreases gradually.
▷ Press down the rocker switch past the point
of resistance: when driving forward, the
speed decreases to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h;
when reversing, the speed decreases to ap‐
prox. 4 mph/6 km/h.
Activating HDC
Press the button; the LED above the but‐
ton lights up.
Deactivating HDC
Press the button again and the LED goes
out. HDC is automatically deactivated
above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
Seite 120
Controls Driving stability control systems
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Display in the instrument cluster
The selected speed is displayed
in the speedometer.
▷ Green: the system is actively
braking the vehicle.
▷ Orange: the system is on
standby.
Malfunction
A message is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated
brake temperatures.
Adaptive Drive
The concept
Adaptive Drive includes the following systems:
▷ Dynamic Drive, refer to page 121
▷ Dynamic Damping Control, refer to
page 121
The system increases driving stability and driv‐
ing comfort.
Dynamic Drive
The concept
Dynamic Drive reduces the lateral inclination of
the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in
curves or during quick evasive maneuvers.
Driving stability and driving comfort are in‐
creased under all driving conditions. The system
utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front and rear
axles that react immediately to all driving situa‐
tions.
Programs
The system offers two different programs.
The programs can be selected via the Driving
Experience Switch, refer to page 122.
SPORT
Sporty tuning for greater driving agility.
COMFORT
Comfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort.
Dynamic Damping Control
The concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
The system enhances driving dynamics and
comfort as required for the road surface and
driving style.
Programs
The system offers three different programs.
The programs can be selected via the Driving
Experience Switch, refer to page 122.
SPORT
Consistently sporty control of the shock absorb‐
ers for greater driving agility.
COMFORT / ECO PRO
Balanced tuning between the COMFORT+ and
SPORT or SPORT+ programs.
COMFORT+
Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers
for optimal traveling comfort.
Integral Active Steering
The concept
Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac‐
tive Steering and rear axle steering.
Active Steering varies the steering angle of the
wheels in relation to the steering wheel move‐
ment as a function of the speed.
Seite 121
Driving stability control systems Controls
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
At speeds up to approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, e.g.,
in curves, the steering angle is increased, i.e.,
steering becomes more direct.
The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu‐
verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in a
direction opposite to the front wheels.
At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas‐
ingly reduced.
The rear wheels are turned to the same angle as
the front wheels.
In critical situations, Integral Active Steering can
specifically steer the front and rear wheels to
stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes,
e.g., when braking where road conditions differ
on the left and right sides of the vehicle.
Initializing
In rare cases, it may become necessary to initi‐
alize the Integral Active Steering.
The warning lamp lights up. A Check
Control message is displayed.
1.
With the engine running, turn the steering
wheel all the way to the left and right several
times in a uniform manner until the warning
lamp disappears.
2. Have the system checked if the warning
lamp does not go out after moving the steer‐
ing wheel approx. 6 times or if the steering
wheel is at an angle.
Using snow chains
Ensure that the rear axle steering is deactivated
when using snow chains, refer to page 188.
Programs
The system offers two different programs.
The programs can be selected via the Driving
Experience Switch, refer to page 122.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the Integral Active
Steering for greater driving agility.
COMFORT
Balanced tuning of the Integral Active Steering
for optimal traveling comfort.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel
must be turned further, while the vehicle re‐
sponds more sensitively to steering wheel
movements in the higher speed range.
The stability-enhancing intervention may be de‐
activated.
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
Have the system checked.
Driving Experience Switch
The concept
The Driving Experience Switch can be used to
adjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle. For
this purpose various programs are available for
selection that are activated via the two buttons
of the Driving Experience Switch and the DSC
OFF-button.
Operating the programs
Press the button Program
DSC OFF
TRACTION
SPORT+
SPORT
COMFORT
COMFORT+
ECO PRO
Automatic program change
The system automatically switches to COM‐
FORT in the following situations:
▷ Failure of Integral Active Steering.
▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control.
Seite 122
Controls Driving stability control systems
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
DSC OFF
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active
Steering system are only performed by the rear
axle steering.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC OFF
Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC lights up in the instru‐
ment cluster and DSC OFF is displayed in the
tachometer.
The DSC system is switched off.
Deactivating DSC OFF
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC indicator lamp
go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When DSC OFF is activated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the tachometer.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC OFF
is activated.
TRACTION
Maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. Driv‐
ing stability is limited during acceleration and
when driving in bends.
Activating TRACTION
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the tachom‐
eter.
The DSC indicator lamp in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up.
Deactivating TRACTION
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC indicator lamp
go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When TRACTION is activated, TRACTION is
displayed in the tachometer.
The indicator lamp lights up: TRACTION
is activated.
SPORT+
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus‐
pension with limited driving stabilization.
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
The driver handles several of the stabilization
tasks.
Activating SPORT+
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT+ appears in the tachometer
and the DSC indicator lamp lights up in the in‐
strument cluster.
Indicator/warning lamps
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension for
greater driving agility with maximum driving sta‐
bilization.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
The configuration is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Seite 123
Driving stability control systems Controls
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Activating SPORT
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT appears in the tachometer.
Configuring SPORT
When the display is activated on the Control
Display, refer to page 125, the SPORTdriving
mode can be set.
After the SPORT driving mode is activated, se‐
lect "Configure SPORT" on the displayed panel
and configure the program.
SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
vated:
1.
"Settings"
2. "SPORT mode" or: "Driving mode"
3. Configure driving mode.
This configuration is retrieved when the SPORT
driving mode is activated.
COMFORT
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving sta‐
bilization.
Activating COMFORT
Press the button repeatedly until the
program display in the tachometer
goes out.
In certain situations, the system automatically
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 122.
COMFORT+
Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers
for optimal traveling comfort with maximum
driving stabilization.
Activating COMFORT+
Press the button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT+ appears in the tachometer.
ECO PRO
ECO PRO, refer to page 170, provides consis‐
tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for
maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐
zation.
Comfort functions and the engine controller are
adjusted.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
1.
Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
Make the desired settings.
Configure driving mode
Settings can be made for the following driving
modes in Driving mode:
▷ SPORT mode, refer to page 124.
▷ ECO PRO mode, refer to page 171.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Selected program
The selected program is dis‐
played in the tachometer.
Seite 124
Controls Driving stability control systems
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a list
of the selectable programs.
Display on the Control Display
Program changes can be displayed briefly on
the Control Display.
To do so, make the following settings:
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Driving mode info"
1. "Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Driving mode info"
Seite 125
Driving stability control systems Controls
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go function, ACC
The concept
This system can be used to select a desired
speed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐
cally on clear roads.
To the extent possible, the system automatically
adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of
you.
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the
vehicle ahead of you can be varied.
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐
tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes
lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead
begins moving faster.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the
system is able to detect this within the given
system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your drives
away again from a halt, your vehicle is able to
accelerate if operated accordingly.
Even if some time passes before the vehicle
drives away again, the BMW can still be accel‐
erated automatically and simply.
As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to the
desired speed.
The speed is also maintained on downhill gra‐
dients, but may not be maintained on uphill
slopes if engine power is insufficient.
General information
When ECO PRO is activated, cruise control is
also set to a driving style that saves on fuel con‐
sumption.
Notes
Personal responsibility
The system does not relieve the driver of
the responsibility to adapt his or her speed, dis‐
tance and driving style to the traffic conditions.
You should drive attentively and intervene ac‐
tively when necessary, e.g. by braking or making
an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is danger
of an accident.◀
At a glance
Buttons on the steering wheel
1 System on/off, interrupt
2 Resume speed
3 Store speed
4 Reduce distance
5 Store, maintain/change speed
6 Increase distance
Seite 126
Controls Driving comfort
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Radar sensor
A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the detec‐
tion of vehicles.
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
move layers of snow and ice carefully.
▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar sen‐
sor.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or interrupted,
actively intervene by braking and, if necessary,
with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring.◀
If switching off the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Press the button.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
and distance are deleted.
Interrupting the system
When active, press the button.
If interrupting the system while stationary, press
on the brake pedal at the same time.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the brakes are applied.
▷ When the clutch pedal is depressed.
▷ When transmission position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is ac‐
tivated or DSC is deactivated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are
opened when the vehicle is standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for an
extended period, e.g., on a road with very lit‐
tle traffic without road edge line markings.
▷ If the radar sensor is dirty.
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the button.
Or:
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
Seite 127
Driving comfort Controls
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
the instrument cluster, refer to page 129.
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Changing, maintaining, and storing the
speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while the sys‐
tem is interrupted to maintain and store the cur‐
rent speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
switched on, if necessary.
Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other‐
wise, there is the danger of an accident occur‐
ring.◀
Speed differences
Large differences in speed relative to ve‐
hicles ahead of the vehicle cannot be compen‐
sated by the system for example in the following
situations:
▷ When catching up rapidly with a truck.
▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves
into the wrong lane.◀
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h. Max. adjustable speed:
110 mph/180 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Distance
Selecting a distance
Adjust the distance according to the traffic
and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the
prescribed safety distance.◀
Reduce distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
The selected distance, refer to page 129, is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Increase distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
The selected distance, refer to page 129, is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Calling up the desired speed and
distance
While driving
Press the button with the system
switched on.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Seite 128
Controls Driving comfort
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
While standing
Before leaving the vehicle, secure it
against rolling.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
mission and apply the parking brake. Otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
The system brought the vehicle to a complete
standstill.
▷ Green mark in the speedometer during a
brief idle phase:
The vehicle ahead of you drives away while
the mark is green: your vehicle accelerates
without anything having to be done.
▷ Switch to orange of the mark in the speed‐
ometer after approx. 2 sec.:
The vehicle ahead of you drives away, while
the mark is orange: in order to accelerate,
briefly press the gas pedal or press the RES
button or SET button.
Rolling bars in the distance indicator mean that
the vehicle ahead of you has driven off.
You actively braked your vehicle to a halt by
pressing on the brake pedal and it is standing
behind another vehicle:
1.
Press the button to call up a stored
desired speed.
2. Release the brake pedal.
3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press the
RES button or the rocker switch when the
vehicle ahead of you drives away.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed
▷ The marking lights up green:
the system is active.
▷ The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system is
switched off.
With instrument display: the symbol is
displayed in the speedometer similarly
to the mark for the desired speed.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
Control messages, it is possible that the system
requirements for operation are currently not
met.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
The selected distance to the vehicle driving
ahead of you is shown.
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set after the system is
switched on.
The system has been interrupted or
distance control is deactivated be‐
cause the accelerator is being
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Distance control is deactivated be‐
cause the accelerator is being
pressed; a vehicle was detected.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven
away.
Seite 129
Driving comfort Controls
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Indicator/warning lamps
Personal responsibility
The indicator and warning lamps do not
relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt
his or her desired driving speed and style to the
traffic conditions.◀
The vehicle symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
The vehicle symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for op‐
erating the system.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively assume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator.
The vehicle symbol flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
You are requested to intervene by brak‐
ing or making an evasive maneuver.
Displays in the Head-up Display
The information from Active Cruise Control can
also be displayed in the Head-up Display.
Adjusting the Head-up Display, refer to
page 146.
System limits
Speed range
Best results are achieved when using the sys‐
tem on well-developed roads and highways.
The desired speed can be selected between
20 mph/30 km/h to 110 mph/180 km/h.
The system can also be activated when station‐
ary.
Comply with the legal speed limit in every situa‐
tion when using the system.
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you
for instance might not be detected.
Limited detection capacity
Because of the limits to the detection ca‐
pacity, you should be alert at all times so that you
can intervene actively, if necessary; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate when a sta‐
tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g.,
a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of traffic
congestion.
The system also does not respond to:
▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road
users.
▷ Red traffic lights.
▷ Stationary objects.
▷ Cross traffic.
▷ Oncoming traffic.
No warnings
A warning may not be issued when ap‐
proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐
stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise, there
is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Seite 130
Controls Driving comfort
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as your
vehicle.
Swerving vehicles
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the
system requests that the driver intervene by
braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if
necessary. You must react yourself; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Unexpected lane change
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves
into another lane from behind a stopped vehicle,
you yourself must react, as the system does not
react to stopped vehicles.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although
curves cannot be anticipated in advance. There‐
fore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.
In tight curves, situations may result due to the
restricted detection range of the system in
which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be
detected at all, or not until after a considerable
delay.
When approaching a curve, the system may re‐
act briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the
vehicle by the system can be compensated for
by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator
pedal is released, the system becomes active
again and independently controls the speed.
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive
away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or be‐
hind bumps in the road.
Seite 131
Driving comfort Controls
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Radar sensor
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ OAYARS3-A
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar sen‐
sor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused
by damage incurred during parking, for example.
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.
Cruise control
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
It maintains the speed that was set using the
control elements on the steering wheel.
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient.
Unfavorable conditions
Do not use the system if unfavorable con‐
ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant
speed, for instance:
▷ On curvy roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on
a loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident.◀
General information
When ECO PRO is activated, cruise control is
also set to a driving style that saves on fuel con‐
sumption.
Controls
At a glance
1 System on/off, interrupt
2 Resume speed
3 Store speed
4 Store, maintain/change speed
Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Seite 132
Controls Driving comfort
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or interrupted,
actively intervene by braking and, if necessary,
with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring.◀
Press the button.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting the system
When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted if:
▷ The brakes are applied.
▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few sec‐
onds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
▷ The transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ HDC is activated.
Maintaining/storing the current speed
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
the speedometer, refer to page 134.
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Changing/maintaining speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while the sys‐
tem is interrupted in order to maintain and store
the current speed.
Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other‐
wise, there is the danger of an accident occur‐
ring.◀
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h.
Max. adjustable speed: 140 mph/230 km/h.
Seite 133
Driving comfort Controls
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it there accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring pres‐
sure on the accelerator. After the rocker
switch is released, the vehicle maintains its
final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the
resistance point causes the vehicle to ac‐
celerate more rapidly.
Resuming the desired speed
Press the button.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator lamp
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster indicates whether the system is
switched on.
Desired speed
▷ The marking lights up green:
the system is active.
▷ The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system is
switched off.
With instrument display: the symbol is
displayed in the speedometer similarly
to the mark for the desired speed.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
Control messages, it is possible that the system
requirements for operation are currently not
met.
PDC Park Distance Control
The concept
PDC supports you when parking. Objects that
you are approaching slowly in front of or behind
your vehicle are indicated by:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
General information
Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors
in the bumpers.
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear corner
sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.
Notes
Check the traffic situation as well
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐
tion. Check the traffic situation around the vehi‐
cle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside of the PDC detection range.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle
may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal
tone.◀
Avoid driving quickly with PDC
Avoid approaching an object quickly.
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet
active.
For technical reasons, the system may other‐
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
Seite 134
Controls Driving comfort
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
PDC Park Distance Control
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the
backup camera, refer to page 136, can be
switched on.
Switching on the backup camera via the
iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Display
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of the
object. For example, if an object is detected to
the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds
from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object becomes,
the shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
If objects are located both in front of and behind
the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is
sounded.
The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds:
▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that
is detected by only one of the corner sen‐
sors.
▷ If moving parallel to a wall.
The signal tone is switched off:
▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
▷ When transmission position P is engaged.
Volume
The volume of the PDC signal can be adjusted,
refer to user's manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are displayed on the Control Dis‐
play before a signal tone sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
Seite 135
Driving comfort Controls
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
The range of the sensors is represented in col‐
ors: red, green and yellow.
If the backup camera image was selected last, it
again appears on the display. To switch to PDC:
1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
2. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
System limits
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physical
limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g.:
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With low objects.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before or
after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may not
be detected.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.
▷ In heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
area on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and main‐
tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Surround View
The concept
Surround View includes the following systems:
▷ Backup camera, refer to page 136.
▷ Side View, refer to page 141.
▷ Top View, refer to page 139.
It assists the driver when parking, maneuvering
and on blind driveways and intersections.
Backup camera
The concept
The backup camera provides assistance in park‐
ing and maneuvering backwards. The area be‐
hind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.
Notes
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the backup camera.◀
Seite 136
Controls Driving comfort
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Backup camera
Camera
The camera lens is located under the BMW em‐
blem of the trunk lid. The image quality may be
impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 214.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The backup camera image is displayed if the
system was switched on via the iDrive.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
Switch on the backup camera via the iDrive, refer
to page 135.
Switching on the backup camera via the
iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The backup camera is switched on.
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
Activating the assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning circle lines are dis‐
played.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Seite 137
Driving comfort Controls
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Pathway lines
▷ Can be shown in the backup camera image
when in transmission position R.
▷ Help you to estimate the space required
when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
▷ Are dependent on the current steering angle
and are continuously adjusted to the steer‐
ing wheel movements.
Turning circle lines
▷ Can be shown in the backup camera image.
▷ Show the course of the smallest possible
turning circle on a level road.
▷ Only one turning circle line is displayed
when the steering wheel is turned.
Obstacle marking
▷ Spatially-shaped markings can be shown in
the backup camera image.
Their colored steps match the markings of the
PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance
to the object shown.
Parking using pathway and turning
circle lines
1.
Position the vehicle so that the turning circle
lines lead to within the limits of the parking
space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
Seite 138
Controls Driving comfort
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Display settings
Brightness
With the backup camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the backup camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
High, protruding objects such as ledges may not
be detected by the backup camera.
Top View
The concept
Top View assists you in parking and maneuver‐
ing. The area around the doors and the road area
around the vehicle are shown on the Control
Display for this purpose.
General information
The image is captured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the
backup camera.
The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the ex‐
terior mirrors are detected early.
Notes
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the cameras.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Top View
Cameras
The lenses of the Top View cameras are located
at the bottom of the exterior mirror housings.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 214.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
Seite 139
Driving comfort Controls
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
The Top View and PDC images are displayed if
the system is switched on via iDrive.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Top View is displayed, switch on the backup
camera via the iDrive, refer to page 140.
Switching on the backup camera via the
iDrive
With Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
The backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Display
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
shown on the Control Display.
When the distance to an object is small, a red bar
is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC
display.
The display appears as soon as Top View is ac‐
tivated.
If the backup camera image was selected last, it
again appears on the display when reverse gear
is selected. To switch to Top View:
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on
the Control Display.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
1.
"Brightness"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With Top View switched on:
1.
"Contrast"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Displaying the turning circle and
pathway lines
▷ The static, red turning circle line shows the
space needed to the side of the vehicle
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists you
in assessing the amount of space actually
needed to the side of the vehicle.
Seite 140
Controls Driving comfort
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
The pathway line is dependent on the cur‐
rent steering angle and is continuously ad‐
justed with the steering wheel movement.
"Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the trunk lid open.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
▷ In poor light.
A Check Control message is displayed in some
of these situations.
Side View
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road users
concealed by obstacles to the left and right of
the vehicle can only be detected relatively late
from the driver's seat. To improve visibility, two
cameras in the front of the vehicle record the
traffic situation on each side.
Notes
The images from both cameras are shown si‐
multaneously on the Control Display.
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle on blind driveways and intersections with
your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could re‐
sult from road users or objects located outside
the picture area of the Side View cameras.◀
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Side View
Cameras
Two cameras integrated in the bumpers capture
the image.
The two camera lenses are located on the sides
of the bumper.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 214.
Switching on/off
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Seite 141
Driving comfort Controls
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Display
The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
on the Control Display.
Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the
position of the front of the vehicle.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1.
"Brightness"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
1.
"Contrast"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
System limits
The cameras capture a maximum range of
330 ft/100 m.
Parking assistant
The concept
This system assists the driver in parking parallel
to the road.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.
A component of the parking assistant is the PDC
Park Distance Control, refer to page 134.
Notes
Personal responsibility
The parking assistant does not relieve the
driver of responsibility for the vehicle during the
parking procedure.
Watch the parking space and parking procedure
closely and intervene if necessary; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident.◀
Changes to the parking space
Changes to the parking space after it was
measured are not taken into account by the sys‐
tem.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
dent occurring.◀
Transporting loads
Loads that extend beyond the perimeter
of the vehicle are not taken into account by the
system during the parking procedure.
Seite 142
Controls Driving comfort
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
dent occurring.◀
Curbs
The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehicle
may become damaged.◀
An engine that has been switched off by the
Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
cally when the parking assistant is activated.
Requirements
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the driv‐
er's side, the corresponding turn signal must
be set.
Suitable parking space
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Minimum length of the gap: own vehicle's
length plus approx 4 ft/1.2 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking procedure
Closed doors.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle
Parking assistant
Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasounds sensors used to measure park‐
ing spaces are located in the side turn signals.
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and main‐
tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Switching on/off
Switching on with the button
Press the button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Seite 143
Driving comfort Controls
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Activate:
"Parking Assistant" Select the
symbol in the Control Display.
Switching off
The system can be deactivated as follows:
▷ Press the button.
▷ Switch off the ignition.
Display on the Control Display
Activating/deactivating the system
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but not
activated.
The system is activated.
System status
The status is displayed with symbols.
Gray: parking space search.
Blue: the system is activated. A
suitable parking space was
found.
The parking procedure is active.
Steering control has been seized.
Status of the parking space search
▷ Gray, arrow 1: parking space search.
▷ Blue, arrow 2: parking space is suitable.
The vehicle is parked in the parking space if
the parking procedure is active.
▷ No display: no parking space search.
Parking using the parking assistant
Check the traffic situation as well
Loud sounds outside and within the vehi‐
cle can drown out the signal tones of the parking
assistant and PDC.
Check the traffic situation around the vehicle
with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the dan‐
ger of an accident.◀
1.
Switch on the parking assistant and activate
it if necessary.
The status of the parking space search is in‐
dicated on the Control Display.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
To achieve the best possible parking posi‐
tion, wait for the automatic steering wheel
movement after the gear change when the
vehicle is stationary.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
Seite 144
Controls Driving comfort
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec‐
essary.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol on
the Control Display.
▷ Press the button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if
he takes over steering.
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the
instruction on the Control Display.
▷ If a turn signal is activated in the opposite
direction to the desired side for parking.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces
if necessary.
▷ If doors are open.
▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays
clearances that are too small.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts or
the time taken for parking is exceeded.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Continuing
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued if necessary.
Follow the instructions on the Control Display to
do this.
System limits
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assistance
in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When sensors are dirty or iced over.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ When leaves or snow has collected in the
parking space.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physical
limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g. in the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure,
such as fences.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before or
after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may not
be detected.
The parking assistant may identify parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked.
Seite 145
Driving comfort Controls
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Head-up Display
The concept
This system projects important information into
the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
In this way, the driver can get information with‐
out averting his or her eyes from the road.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐
tings.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
Display
Overview
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Collision warning.
▷ Speed limit detection.
▷ Cruise control.
▷ Lane departure warning.
Some of this information is only displayed briefly
as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient light.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
The brightness is adjusted.
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐
tionally influenced using the instrument lighting,
refer to page 96.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Seite 146
Controls Driving comfort
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Adjusting the height
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the controller.
The height is adjusted.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Setting the rotation
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Rotation"
4. Turn the controller.
Rotation is set.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double images
from being displayed.
Therefore, have the special windshield replaced
by a service center only.
Seite 147
Driving comfort Controls
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Climate control
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Automatic climate control
1 Air distribution, left
2 Temperature, left
3 AUTO program, left
4 Air flow, AUTO intensity, residual heat, left
5 Remove ice and condensation
6 Maximum cooling
7 Display
8 Air flow, AUTO intensity, right
9 AUTO program, right
10 Temperature, right
11 Air distribution, right
12 Seat heating, right 53
13 Active seat ventilation, right 53
14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
15 Cooling function
16 Rear window defroster
17 ALL program
18 Active seat ventilation, left 53
19 Seat heating, left 53
Seite 148
Controls Climate control
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Climate control functions in detail
Manual air distribution
Press the button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
▷ Footwell.
▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only.
▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell:
driver's side only.
If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO
button on the driver's side to utilize the conden‐
sation sensor.
Temperature
Turn the wheel to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
with the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate control
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
temperature.
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐
rected to the windshield, side windows, upper
body, and into the footwell.
The cooling function, refer to page 150, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐
densation as much as possible.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, automatic
control of the air flow and air distribution can be
adjusted.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase the intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Convertible program
When the convertible top is open, the
convertible program is activated as well. In the
convertible program, the automatic climate con‐
trol is optimized for driving with the convertible
top open. In addition, the air flow is increased as
the vehicle speed increases.
The efficiency of the convertible program can be
greatly enhanced by installing the wind deflec‐
tor.
Air flow, manual
To be able to manually adjust the air flow, switch
off the AUTO program first.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control may
be reduced automatically to save battery power.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Press the button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
Seite 149
Climate control Controls
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
The air flow can be adjusted when the program
is active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the cooling function or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air flow and recirculated-air
mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐
gion. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷ At an external temperature of approx.
32 ℉/0 ℃.
▷ When the engine is running.
The air flow can be adjusted when the program
is active.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out‐
side air and controls the shutoff automati‐
cally.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO but‐
ton on the driver's side to utilize the condensa‐
tion sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the
windshield.
Continuous recirculated-air mode
The recirculated-air mode should not be
used for an extended period of time, as the air
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.◀
Cooling function
The passenger compartment can only be
cooled with the engine running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified and,
depending on the temperature setting, warmed
again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water, refer to page 166, develops
that exits underneath the vehicle.
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
The rear window defroster is only active when
the rear window is closed.
ALL program
Press the button.
Current settings on the driver's side for
the temperature, air flow, air distribution, and
AUTO program are transferred to the front pas‐
senger side.
The program is switched off if the settings on
the front passenger side are changed.
Seite 150
Controls Climate control
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the
interior.
Functional requirement
▷ Up to 20 minutes after the engine has been
switched off.
▷ Warm engine.
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃.
Switching on
1.
Switch off the ignition.
2. Press the right side of the button on
the driver's side.
is shown on the display of the automatic cli‐
mate control.
The interior temperature, air volume and air dis‐
tribution can be adjusted with the ignition
switched on.
Switching off
At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the
button on the driver's side.
on the display of the automatic climate control
goes out.
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
▷ Complete system:
Press and hold the left button on
the driver's side until the control
clicks off.
▷ On the front passenger side:
Press and hold the left button on
the front passenger side.
Switching on
Press any button except:
▷ ALL program.
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of Air volume button.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Seat ventilation.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
This combined filter should be replaced during
scheduled maintenance, refer to page 195, of
your vehicle.
Ventilation
Front ventilation
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 1.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 2.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 3.
Adjusting the ventilation
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Seite 151
Climate control Controls
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐
rection, such as if the vehicle interior is hot
from the sun.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Parked-car ventilation
The concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehicle
interior and lowers its temperature, if necessary.
The system can be switched on and off directly
or by using two preset switch-on times. It re‐
mains switched on for 30 minutes.
Operation can be performed via iDrive.
Parked-car ventilation
Using the preset switch-on time or when oper‐
ated directly: any external temperature.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes if the system is switched on.
The system continues to run for some time after
being switched off.
Preselecting the switch-on time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the switch-on time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate control
lights up when the switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes when the system has been switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reactivated.
Seite 152
Controls Climate control
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Integrated universal remote
control
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can op‐
erate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐
tems such as garage door drives or lighting sys‐
tems. The integrated universal remote control
replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmit‐
ters. To operate the remote control, the buttons
on the interior rearview mirror must be program‐
med with the desired functions. The hand-held
transmitter for the particular system is required
in order to program the remote control.
During programming
During programming and before activat‐
ing a device using the integrated universal re‐
mote control, ensure that there are no people,
animals, or objects in the range of movement of
the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there
is a risk of injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the instructions of the system to be
controlled, the system is generally com‐
patible with the integrated universal remote
control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ Your service center.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.
Controls on the interior rearview mirror
▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the left and right button on
the interior rearview mirror simultaneously
for approximately 20 seconds until the LED
on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
erases all programming of the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to
8 cm away from the buttons on the interior
Seite 153
Interior equipment Controls
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
rearview mirror. The required distance de‐
pends on the manual transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button of
the desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter and the button to be programmed on
the interior rearview mirror. The LED on the
interior rearview mirror will begin flashing
slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. When the LED is flash‐
ing faster, this indicates that the button on
the interior rearview mirror has been pro‐
grammed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least
60 seconds, change the distance between
the interior rearview mirror and the hand-
held transmitter and repeat the step. Several
more attempts at different distances may be
necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds be‐
tween attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the
interior rearview mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held trans‐
mitter button for 2 seconds.
6.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the interior
rearview mirror buttons.
Special feature of the alternating-code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after re‐
peated programming, please check if the sys‐
tem to be controlled features an alternating-
code system.
Read the system's operating manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior rearview
mirror longer. If the LED on the interior rearview
mirror starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit
constantly for 2 seconds, the system features
an alternating-code system. Flashing and con‐
tinuous illumination of the LED will repeat for
approximately 20 seconds.
For systems with an alternating-code system,
the integrated universal remote control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the operating manual of the system
being set up for information on how to syn‐
chronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
person.
To synchronize:
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
rearview mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You have
approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior rearview mirror for approximately
3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
repeat this work step up to three times in or‐
der to finish synchronization. Once synchro‐
nization is complete, the programmed func‐
tion will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror
button to be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED
starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
transmitter for the system to be controlled
approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The
required distance depends on the manual
transmitter.
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held transmit‐
ter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior
rearview mirror LED flashes more rapidly.
When the LED is flashing faster, this indi‐
cates that the button on the interior rearview
mirror has been programmed. The system
Seite 154
Controls Interior equipment
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
can then be controlled by the button on the
interior rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least
60 seconds, change the distance and repeat
the step. Several more attempts at different
distances may be necessary. Wait at least
15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the
interior rearview mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held trans‐
mitter button for 2 seconds.
Controls
Before operation
Before operating a system using the
integrated universal remote control, ensure that
there are no people, animals, or objects within
the range of movement of the remote-controlled
system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or
damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror while the engine is running or when
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the
button within receiving range of the system until
the function is activated. The interior rearview
mirror LED stays lit while the wireless signal is
being transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the left and right button on the
interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Manual-shift transmission: opening
Press on the cover.
Automatic transmission: open
Press the button.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote con‐
trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that
children cannot use the lighter and burn them‐
selves.◀
Seite 155
Interior equipment Controls
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Connecting electrical devices
Note
Do not plug the charger into the socket
Do not connect battery chargers to the
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle. Doing so
may result in damage to the vehicle.◀
Sockets
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is running
or when the ignition is switched on. The total
load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at
12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
Manual transmission: center console
Press on the cover.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Automatic transmission: center
console
Press the button.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
In the front passenger footwell
Socket is located below the glove compartment.
To access the socket: fold open the cover.
Center armrest
Remove cover.
Ski bag
Capacity
The ski bag makes it possible to transport two
pairs of skis up to a length of 6 ft/2.10 m.
Preparing and loading the ski bag
1.
Pull the release in the direction of the arrow,
and remove the insert from the front. If nec‐
Seite 156
Controls Interior equipment
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
essary, when pulling the release, press
against the insert.
2. Lay out the ski bag.
3. Press button in the cargo area, open tail‐
board and attach to the rear wall via mag‐
netic holder.
4. Load the ski bag. If necessary, wrap the
sharp edges of the skis.
5. Tighten the retaining strap.
Securing the ski bag
Secure the ski bag by tightening the re‐
taining strap; otherwise, the contents could
present a source of danger to the passengers,
for example during braking or evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
Stowing the ski bag
Proceed in the reverse order of loading.
When replacing the insert, place both pins into
the rail at the bottom and press the insert back
in place until a 'click' is heard. Ensure that the
rear seat backrest upholstery is not damaged.
Seite 157
Interior equipment Controls
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Notes
No loose objects in the passenger com‐
partment
Do not stow any objects in the passenger com‐
partment without securing them; otherwise,
they may present a danger to occupants for in‐
stance during braking and avoidance maneu‐
vers.◀
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐
board
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard.
The mat materials could damage the dash‐
board.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 158.
▷ Storage compartment on the center con‐
sole: manual transmission.
▷ Storage compartment in the center armrest,
refer to page 159.
▷ Compartments in the doors.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.
▷ Net in the front passenger footwell.
Glove compartment
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately after
use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur
during accidents.◀
Closing
Fold up the cover.
USB interface for data transfer
At a glance
The USB interface is located in the glove com‐
partment.
Seite 158
Controls Storage compartments
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
General information
Connection for importing and exporting data on
USB devices, e.g.:
▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 31.
▷ Music collection, see user's manual for Nav‐
igation, Entertainment and Communication.
Notes
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Front center armrest
Opening
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Press the buttons next to the lock.
Locking the storage compartment
The storage compartment in the armrest can be
locked with an integrated key to separately se‐
cure the trunk lid, refer to page 39, for example.
After the storage compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed out without the
integrated key, refer to page 30, for instance at
a hotel.
This prevents access to the storage compart‐
ment and to the cargo area.
Connection for an external audio
device
.
For a description, see the user's
manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication.
Cupholders
Notes
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the
increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain‐
ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam‐
age.◀
Seite 159
Storage compartments Controls
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Manual transmission: center console
A cupholder is located on the center console.
Manual transmission: center armrest
A cupholder is located in the center armrest
compartment.
To open: press the buttons next to the lock.
Automatic transmission: center
console
To open: press on the cover.
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Net
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
rear cargo area trim.
Lashing eyes
To secure the cargo, refer to page 168, there
are lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Storage compartment under the cargo
floor cover
Raise the cargo floor cover using the strap.
Seite 160
Controls Storage compartments
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Seite 161
Storage compartments Controls
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information useful
in dealing with specific driving and operating
modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a
long vehicle life and good economy.
Engine and differential
Always obey the official speed limit.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode for the initial
miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe‐
riod.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and discs. Drive moderately during this break-in
period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same breaking in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing the trunk lid
Drive with the trunk lid closed
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
wise, in the event of an accident or braking or
evasive maneuvers, passengers or other road
users may be injured or the vehicle may be dam‐
aged. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the
passenger compartment.◀
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ If the convertible top is closed, close all win‐
dows.
▷ Greatly increase the blower speed.
▷ Drive moderately.
Seite 164
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. When driv‐
ing, standing at idle and while parking, take care
to avoid possible contact between the hot ex‐
haust system and any highly flammable materi‐
als such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact
could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious
personal injury as well as property damage.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there
is the danger of getting burned.◀
Climate control windshield
The marked area is not covered with heat re‐
flective coating.
Use this area for garage door openers, devices
for electronic toll collection, etc.
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
hicle
It is advised that you do not use mobile commu‐
nication devices, e.g., mobile phones, inside the
vehicle without connecting them directly to the
external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle elec‐
tronics and mobile communication devices can
interfere with each other. In addition, there is no
assurance that the radiation generated during
transmission will be discharged from the vehicle
interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
Driving through water
Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper
than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no
faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.
Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
tions
Do not exceed this water depth and walking
speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the elec‐
trical systems and the transmission may be
damaged.◀
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
sary.
The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.
You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum
of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Seite 165
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Objects in the area around the pedals
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
again after they were removed for cleaning, for
example.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly
exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every
few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
road users.
The heat generated in this process helps dry the
brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
in which the least braking is required. Otherwise,
the brake system may overheat, resulting in a
reduction in the brake system efficiency.
Manual transmission:
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
necessary.
Automatic transmission:
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down in the manual mode of the auto‐
matic transmission.
Avoid load on the brakes
Avoid placing excessive load on the brake
system. Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos‐
sibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In
addition, steering and brake assist is unavailable
with the engine stopped.◀
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
on the brake pads are furthered by:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
fect that generally cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops that exits underneath
the vehicle.
Therefore, traces of condensed water under the
vehicle are normal.
Seite 166
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Loading
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved carrying
capacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle.
Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐
creases the rate at which damage develops in‐
side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss
of tire inflation pressure.◀
No fluids in the trunk
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.◀
Determining the load limit
1.
Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐
hicle and unstable driving situations may
result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail‐
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Seite 167
Loading Driving tips
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Stowing cargo
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low
as possible, ideally directly behind the cargo
area separating wall.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo, there are four lashing eyes
in the cargo area
Securing cargo
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps or with a cargo net or draw
straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo
straps.
Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining straps or
draw straps on the lashing eyes in the cargo
area.
Securing cargo
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above; otherwise, it can endanger the
car's occupants if sudden braking or swerving
becomes necessary.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be
thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐
den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐
pants.◀
Seite 168
Driving tips Loading
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance can have an
influence on fuel consumption and on the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Closing the windows
Open windows increase air resistance and
therefore lead to greater fuel consumption.
Check the tire inflation
pressure regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before start‐
ing on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
Avoid high engine speeds
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be‐
ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When
accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐
gine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into the
highest applicable gear and drive with the en‐
gine speed as low as possible and at a constant
speed.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Seite 169
Saving fuel Driving tips
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
The gear shift indicator of your vehicle indicates
the most fuel efficient gear.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the ac‐
celerator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle au‐
tomatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐
duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds
of switching off the engine.
Using this system can cause certain compo‐
nents of the vehicle to become worn prema‐
turely.
Iin addition, fuel consumption is also determined
by other factors, such as driving style, road con‐
ditions, maintenance or environmental factors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐
dow defroster require a lot of energy and con‐
sume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they are
not actually needed.
Have maintenance carried out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
Have the maintenance carried out by your serv‐
ice center.
Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 195.
ECO PRO
The concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on
fuel consumption. For this purpose, the engine
control and comfort functions, e. g. the climate
control output, are adjusted.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions can
be displayed that assist in driving in a manner
that optimizes fuel consumption.
The extension of the range that is achieved as a
result can be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Display in the instrument cluster
ECO PRO bonus range
An extension of the range can be
achieved by an adjusted driving
style.
This may be displayed as the bo‐
nus range in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Seite 170
Driving tips Saving fuel
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Driving style
In the tachometer, a mark in the
bar display indicates the current
efficiency of the driving style cor‐
responding to the accelerator
pedal position.
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long as
the mark moves within the blue range.
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by
backing off the accelerator pedal.
The display switches to blue as soon as all con‐
ditions for fuel-economy-optimized driving are
met.
ECO PRO Tip - driving instruction
The arrow indicates that the driv‐
ing style can be adjusted to be
more fuel efficient by backing off
the accelerator.
Additional symbols
Symbol Measure
For efficient driving style, back off the
accelerator or delay accelerating to
allow time to assess road conditions.
Reduce speed to the selected ECO
PRO speed.
Automatic transmission: switch from
S/M to D or avoid manual shift inter‐
ventions.
Manual shift transmission: follow
shifting instructions.
Manual shift transmission: engage
neutral for engine stop.
Display in the instrument display
When ECO PRO mode is activated, the display
switches to a special configuration.
Some of the displays may differ from the display
in the instrument cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
Via the Driving Experience Switch
1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
3. Configure the program.
Via the iDrive
1.
"Settings"
2. "ECO PRO mode"
Or
1.
"Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure ECO PRO"
Configure the program.
ECO PRO Tip
▷ "ECO PRO limit:":
Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PRO
Tip is to be displayed.
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":
A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PRO
speed is exceeded.
ECO PRO climate control
"ECO PRO climate control"
Seite 171
Saving fuel Driving tips
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-effi‐
cient.
By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
ture, or adjusting the rate of heating or cooling
of the passenger compartment fuel consump‐
tion can be economized.
The output of the seat heater is also reduced.
ECO PRO Potential
The percentage of potential savings that can be
achieved with the current configuration is dis‐
played.
Indications on the Control Display
EfficientDynamics
Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
ogy can be displayed during driving.
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
Displaying fuel consumption history
The average fuel consumption can be displayed
within an adjustable time frame.
"Consumption history"
Adjusting fuel consumption history
time frame
Select the symbol.
Resetting fuel consumption history
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Reset consumption history"
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
The current efficiency can be displayed.
"EfficientDynamics Info"
The following systems are displayed:
▷ Automatic engine Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Climate control output.
Display ECO PRO tips
"ECO PRO Tips"
The setting is stored for the profile currently in
use.
Seite 172
Driving tips Saving fuel
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Seite 173
Saving fuel Driving tips
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Mobility
To ensure that you remain mobile at all times, this
chapter supplies you with important information
on the topics of fuels and lubricants, wheels and
tires, service, maintenance, and Roadside
Assistance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Refueling
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not
ensured and damage may occur.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1.
Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1.
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape.
A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐
ample.
Seite 176
Mobility Refueling
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
1. Open the cover on the right side trim.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump sym‐
bol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when
refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise fuel
may escape, causing harm to the environment
and damaging the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels
Obey safety regulations posted at the gas
station.◀
Seite 177
Refueling Mobility
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Fuel
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Fuel quality
Gasoline
For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐
out metallic additives.
Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐
line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or
iron, or permanent damage to the catalytic con‐
verter and other components.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %,
i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should satisfy the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Do not refuel with ethanol E85
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this
would damage the engine and fuel supply sys‐
tem.◀
The engine is knock controlled. Therefore, you
can refuel with different gasoline qualities.
Recommended fuel quality
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
Minimum fuel grade
Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐
mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐
formance.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Minimum fuel grade
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and
stalling, especially under certain environmental
conditions such as high ambient temperature
and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI number
— for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine
deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase
gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
nance.◀
Seite 178
Mobility Fuel
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
Checking the pressure
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires
are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure
and correct it as needed: at least twice a month
and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this
precaution, you may be driving on tires with in‐
correct tire pressures, a condition that may not
only compromise your vehicle's driving stability,
but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an
accident.◀
After correcting the tire inflation pressure:
▷ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
▷ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 180, contains all pressure specifications
for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐
perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐
proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands.
This information can be obtained from your
service center.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/
160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 180, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on the
tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
pillar.
Maximum permissible speed
Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀
Seite 179
Wheels and tires Mobility
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
640i
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.3 / 33 2.6 / 38
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.3 / 33
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y
XL RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.9 /42
Compact wheel:
T 135/90 R 17 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
650i
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/
PSI with cold tires
245/45 R 18 100 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V M
+S XL RSC
2.3 / 33 2.6 / 38
Front: 245/45 R 18 96
Y RSC
Rear: 275/40 R 18 99
Y RSC
2.3 / 33
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 245/40 R 19 94
Y RSC
Rear: 275/35 R 19 96
Y RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 245/35 R 20 95
Y XL RSC
Rear: 275/30 R 20 97
Y XL RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.9 /42
Seite 180
Mobility Wheels and tires
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
650i xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/
PSI with cold tires
245/45 R 18 100 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V M
+S XL RSC
2.4 / 35 2.7 / 39
Front: 245/45 R 18 96
Y RSC
Rear: 275/40 R 18 99
Y RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 245/40 R 19 94
Y RSC
Rear: 275/35 R 19 96
Y RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 245/35 R 20 95
Y XL RSC
Rear: 275/30 R 20 97
Y XL RSC
2.8 / 41
-
-
3.0 / 44
Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds
above 100 mph/160 km/h
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex‐
cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and,
if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant
table on the following pages. Otherwise tire
damage and accidents could occur.◀
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
640i
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.3 / 33
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y
XL RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.9 /42
Compact wheel:
T 135/90 R 17 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature
Seite 181
Wheels and tires Mobility
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.5 / 36
-
-
2.7 / 39
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
3.0 / 44
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y
XL RSC
2.8 / 41
-
-
3.3 / 48
Compact wheel:
T 135/90 R 17 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
650i
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/
PSI with cold tires
245/45 R 18 100 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V M
+S XL RSC
2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear: 275/40 R 18 99
Y RSC
2.3 / 33
-
-
2.4 / 35
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear: 275/35 R 19 96
Y RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear: 275/30 R 20 97
Y XL RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.9 /42
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
Seite 182
Mobility Wheels and tires
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
2.5 / 36
-
-
2.7 / 39
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
3.0 / 44
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y XL
RSC
2.9 / 42
-
-
3.3 / 48
650i xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/
PSI with cold tires
245/45 R 18 100 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V M
+S XL RSC
2.7 / 39 3.0 / 44
Front: 245/45 R 18 96
Y RSC
Rear: 275/40 R 18 99
Y RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.4 / 35
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Front: 245/40 R 19 94
Y RSC
Rear: 275/35 R 19 96
Y RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 245/35 R 20 95
Y XL RSC
Rear: 275/30 R 20 97
Y XL RSC
2.8 / 41
-
-
3.0 / 44
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/
PSI with cold tires
245/45 R 18 100 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V M
+S XL RSC
2.8 / 41 3.2 / 46
245/40 R 19 98 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
3.0 / 44 3.4 / 49
Front: 245/45 R 18
96 Y RSC
Rear: 275/40 R 18 99
Y RSC
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
Front: 245/40 R 19
94 Y RSC
Rear: 275/35 R 19 96
Y RSC
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.8 / 41
Front: 245/35 R 20
95 Y XL RSC
Rear: 275/30 R 20 97
Y XL RSC
3.0 / 44
-
-
3.2 / 46
Seite 183
Wheels and tires Mobility
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3510
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
3510: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
DOT … 3510: the tire was manufactured in the
35th week in 2010.
Recommendation
Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every
6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and cli‐
mate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfa‐
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
planing, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
Seite 184
Mobility Wheels and tires
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and pos‐
sible tire failure.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 187, are labeled with
a circular symbol containing the letters RSC
marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
circumference and have the legally required
minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI,
Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐
jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Notes
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as
well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐
file tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
fects:
▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
to pull to the left or right.
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over
curbs, road damage, or similar things.
Seite 185
Wheels and tires Mobility
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
wheels and tires checked right away; otherwise,
there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the next service center or tire
shop.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.
Otherwise, tire damage can be life-threatening
for vehicle occupants and other traffic partici‐
pants.◀
Repair of tire damage
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Information on mounting tires
Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center or tire specialist.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Wheel and tire combination
Information on the correct wheel-tire combina‐
tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be ob‐
tained from your service center.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the
function of a variety of systems such as ABS or
DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
Approved wheels and tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
mends that you use only wheels and tires that
have been approved for your particular vehicle
model.
For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body contact
and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu‐
ate non-approved wheels and tires to determine
if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot
ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they
are mounted.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling.
New tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe‐
riod.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Seite 186
Mobility Wheels and tires
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Retreaded tires
Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
limit service life and have a negative impact on
road safety.◀
Winter tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field of
vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire spe‐
cialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for the
winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and acci‐
dents can occur.◀
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad
to advise you.
Rotating wheels between axles
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against swapping wheels between the front and
rear axles.
This can impair the handling characteristics.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels are composed of special rims and
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐
gree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
of a pressure loss.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
page 107.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
page 104.
Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your
service center will be glad to advise you.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have
been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle,
classified as road-safe and recommended.
Seite 187
Wheels and tires Mobility
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Consult your service center for more informa‐
tion.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 225/55 R 17.
▷ 245/45 R 18.
▷ 245/40 R 19
Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐
ficiently tight. Retighten as needed according to
the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when
using snow chains.
Snow chain detection
The concept
When using snow chains, you should set
whether you are driving with or without snow
chains via the iDrive.
The snow chain detection system supports you
by automatically showing the detected state on
the Control Display.
When snow chains are in use, the rear axle steer‐
ing of the Integral Active Steering is deactivated
automatically.
At speeds above the maximum permitted speed
with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear
axle steering is activated again automatically.
Activating the status
1. "Settings"
2. "Tire chains"
3. "Tire chains installed"
Automatic detection
If functioning properly:
▷ Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not
activated .
After you drive a short distance, a Check
Control message is shown and the state is
activated automatically.
Confirm the automatic activation.
▷ Snow chains are not mounted. The setting
is activated .
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, a Check
Control message is displayed. Deactivate
the status manually.
If not functioning properly:
▷ Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not
activated .
A Check Control message is not displayed.
The automatic detection system is malfunc‐
tioning. Activate the status manually.
Activating/deactivating rear axle
steering
If the status indicating that snow chains are in
use is activated, the rear axle steering is deacti‐
vated automatically.
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle
steering is activated again, even though snow
chains are in use.
Seite 188
Mobility Wheels and tires
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Vehicle identification number
2 Jump-starting, negative terminal
3 Washer fluid reservoir
4 Jump-starting, positive terminal
5 Oil filler neck.
6 Coolant reservoitr, except 650i.
Hood
Opening the hood
Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Seite 189
Engine compartment Mobility
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Never reach into the engine compartment
Never reach into the intermediate spaces
or gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise,
there is risk of injury, e.g. from rotating or hot
parts.◀
1. Pull the lever.
2. Press the release handle and open the hood.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Danger of injury when the hood is open
There is a danger of injury from protruding
parts when the hood is open.◀
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx.
16 in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
Hood open when driving
If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over imme‐
diately and close it securely.◀
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Seite 190
Mobility Engine compartment
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Engine oil
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Engine oil consumption depends on driving
style and driving conditions, e.g., if your driving
style is very sporty engine oil consumption will
be considerably greater.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
Checking the oil level
electronically
Status display
The concept
The oil level is monitored electronically during
driving and shown on the Control Display.
If the oil level reaches the minimum level, a
check control message is displayed.
Requirements
Depending on the previous displays, the status
display appears when the engine is running or
after the vehicle has been driven for at least 30
minutes.
Displaying the oil level
1.
"Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Oil level display messages
Different messages appear on the display de‐
pending on the oil level. Pay attention to these
messages.
If oil level is too low, immediately add 1 US
quart/liter of oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immediately;
otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Detailed measurement
The concept
In the detailed measurement the oil level is
checked and displayed via a scale.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
General information
A detailed measurement is only possible with
certain engines.
Requirements
▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral
position, clutch and accelerator pedals not
depressed.
▷ Automatic transmission: selector lever in
transmission position N or P and accelerator
not depressed.
▷ Vehicle is on a level road and the engine is
running at operating temperature.
Seite 191
Engine oil Mobility
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Performing a detailed measurement
In order to perform a detailed measurement of
the engine oil level:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Measure engine oil level"
4. "Start measurement"
The oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.
Duration: approx. 1 minute.
Adding engine oil
Filler neck
When the indicator lights up in the instrument
cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil within
the next 125 miles/200 km.
Protect children
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
to prevent health risks.◀
Oil types for refilling
Notes
No oil additives
Oil additives may lead to engine damage.◀
Viscosity grades for engine oils
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,
and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine dam‐
age may occur.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Some types of oils in some cases are not avail‐
able in all countries.
Approved oil types
Gasoline engine
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30
BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Additional information about the approved
types of oils can be requested from the service
center.
Alternative oil types
If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following
specification can be added:
Gasoline engine
API SM or superior grade specification
Oil change
An oil change should be carried out by your
service center only.
Seite 192
Mobility Engine oil
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Seite 193
Engine oil Mobility
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Coolant
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while the
engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may
cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise, en‐
gine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are suit‐
able for your vehicle. Ask your service center for
suitable additives.
Coolant level
Checking
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, and then open it.
3. The coolant level is correct if it lies between
the minimum and maximum marks in the
filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Seite 194
Mobility Coolant
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
BMW Maintenance System
The maintenance system directs you to re‐
quired maintenance measures and thereby sup‐
ports you in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐
mines the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance you need to your user
profile.
Details on the service requirements, refer to
page 84, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is con‐
tinuously stored in the remote control. Your
service center will read out this data and suggest
the right array of service procedures for your ve‐
hicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
mote control that you used most recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a service center update the
time-dependent maintenance procedures,
such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti‐
vated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
additional information on service requirements.
Maintenance and repair should be performed by
your service center. Make sure to have regular
maintenance procedures recorded in the vehi‐
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models, and in the Warranty and Service
Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These en‐
tries are proof of regular maintenance.
Seite 195
Maintenance Mobility
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehicle
emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
Canadian model: warning light indi‐
cates the engine symbol.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐
ous engine misfiring within a brief period can
seriously damage emission control compo‐
nents, in particular the catalytic converter.
Fuel cap
The indicator lamp lights up.
If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,
the OBD system may conclude that fuel
vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tightened,
the display should go out in a short time.
Data memory
Your vehicle records data relating to vehicle op‐
eration, faults and user settings. These data are
stored in the remote control and can be read out
with suitable devices, particularly when the ve‐
hicle is serviced. The data obtained in this way
provide valuable information for service proc‐
esses and repair or for optimizing and develop‐
ing vehicle functions further.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
Seite 196
Mobility Maintenance
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu‐
facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
that have the special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to the vehicle or
the EDR.
Seite 197
Maintenance Mobility
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored under the
cargo floor cover in the cargo area.
Wiper blade replacement
General information
Do not fold down the wipers without wiper
blades
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have
not been installed; this may damage the wind‐
shield.◀
Replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to
page 72, the wiper arms.
2. Fold up the wipers.
3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po‐
sition.
4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.
Lamp and bulb replacement
Notes
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
the service center if you are unfamiliar with them
or they are not described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at the service center.
Seite 198
Mobility Replacing components
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
otherwise, there is the danger of getting
burned.◀
Working on the lighting system
When working on the lighting system, you
should always switch off the lights affected to
prevent short circuits.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
service center. Due to the high voltage present
in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries
if work is carried out improperly.◀
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or
hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover
serve as the light source for controls, display el‐
ements and other equipment.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never stare
into the unfiltered light for several hours; other‐
wise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
Headlamp glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the light switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
lamp glasses do not need to be changed.
If the headlamps do not dim despite driving with
the light switched on, increasing humidity forms,
e. g. water droplets in the light, have the service
center check this.
Xenon headlamps
Notes
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like‐
lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps
on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a xenon bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps
and continue the trip with great care. Comply
with local regulations.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
service center. Due to the high voltage present
in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries
if work is carried out improperly.◀
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
please contact your BMW center.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 198.
With Xenon-headlamps, the following lamps are
designed with LED technology:
▷ Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps
▷ Turn signals, incl. side indicators
▷ Front fog lamps
▷ Daytime running lights
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Seite 199
Replacing components Mobility
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Turning lamp on the Xenon headlamp
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 198.
The illustration shows the left side of the engine
compartment.
55-watt bulb, H3
1. Turn the cap and remove it.
2. Detach the wire bracket.
3. Disconnect the cable at the plug-in connec‐
tion and remove the bulb.
4. Insert the new bulb. Ensure that the bulb has
the correct orientation. Because of its
shape, the bulb can only be inserted in one
direction.
5. Secure the bulb with the wire bracket.
6. Connect the bulb.
7. Mount the cap.
LED headlamps
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 198.
With LED headlamps, all front lamps and side
indicators are designed with LED technology.
If and LED fails, switch on the front fog lamps
and continue the trip with great care. Comply
with local regulations.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
At a glance
1 Turn signal/brake lamp
2 Reversing lamp
3 Inside brake lamp
4 Tail lamp
5 Outside brake lamp
6 Rear reflector
Turn signal, outer brake, tail, and
license plate lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 198.
These lights feature LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Seite 200
Mobility Replacing components
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Lamps in the trunk lid
Access to the lamps
If necessary, remove the fasteners using the
screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit
and fold away the cover.
Inside brake lamp
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 198.
24-watt bulb, HP24W
1.
Squeeze the bulb holder and pull it out.
2. Pull off the connector.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Mount the bulb holder and the cover of the
trunk lid in reverse order.
Reversing lamp
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 198.
16-watt bulb, W16W
1. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise.
2. Pull out the bulb and replace it.
3. Mount the bulb holder and the cover of the
trunk lid in reverse order.
Changing wheels
Notes
The vehicle equipment does not include a spare
tire.
When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire
does not need to be changed immediately in the
event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your service center.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated in the positions shown.
Seite 201
Replacing components Mobility
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Lug bolt lock
The lug bolt lock is in the onboard vehicle tool
kit or in a storage compartment close to the on‐
board vehicle tool kit, refer to page 198.
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Removing
1.
Attach the adapter to the wheel lug.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
Remove the adapter after screwing the lug bolt
back on.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐
trolyte will last for the life of the battery.
Your service center will be glad to advise you on
questions regarding the battery.
Battery replacement
Use approved vehicle batteries only
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
ble.◀
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your service center
to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available and that any Check Control messages
are no longer displayed.
Charging the battery
Note
Do not plug the charger into the socket
Do not connect battery chargers to the
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle. Doing so
may result in damage to the vehicle.◀
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 206, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
▷ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:
store the positions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Radio station: save again.
▷ Navigation system: wait for the operability of
the navigation.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by your
service center or bring them to a recy‐
cling center.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Seite 202
Mobility Replacing components
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Fuses
Notes
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating; this could
lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in
a fire in the vehicle.◀
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box in
the cargo area.
In the glove compartment
Push the handle to the side, arrow 1, and open
the lid, arrow 2.
In the cargo area
Open the cover on the right side trim.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Seite 203
Replacing components Mobility
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
Emergency Request
Requirements
▷ Equipment version with full preparation
package mobile phone.
An Emergency Request can be made, even
if no mobile phones are paired with the ve‐
hicle.
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
▷ The radio ready state is switched on.
▷ The BMW Assist system is logged in to a
wireless communications network sup‐
ported by BMW Assist.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Emergency Request not guaranteed
For technical reasons, the Emergency Re‐
quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable
conditions.◀
Service contract
▷ After your contract with BMW Assist has ex‐
pired, the BMW Assist system can be deac‐
tivated by the service center without you
having to visit a workshop.
After deactivation, an Emergency Request
is no longer possible.
▷ Under certain circumstances, the system
can be reactivated by a service center after
you sign a new contract.
Initiating an Emergency Request
1.
Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
was initiated.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes if the connection to the
BMW Assist Response Center has been es‐
tablished.
After the Emergency Request arrives at the
BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW
Seite 204
Mobility Breakdown assistance
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Assist Response Center contacts you and
takes further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
Assist Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circumstan‐
ces.
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle if
it can be established, are transmitted to the
BMW Assist Response Center.
▷ If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard on the
hands-free system, the hands-free system
may be malfunctioning. However, the BMW
Assist Response Center may still be able to
hear you.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately after
a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notifica‐
tion is not affected by pressing the SOS button.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located under a cover on
the left side of the cargo area.
Press against the lower edge of the cover and
remove the cover.
First aid kit
The first aid kit is located in the insert in the rear
seat backrest.
1. Pull the release in the direction of the arrow,
and remove the insert from the front. If nec‐
essary, when pulling the release, press
against the insert.
2. Remove the first aid kit.
When replacing the insert, place both pins into
the rail at the bottom and press the insert back
in place until a 'click' is heard. Ensure that the
rear seat backrest upholstery is not damaged.
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐
ularly and replace any expired items promptly.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around the
clock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐
tance there in the event of a vehicle breakdown.
Seite 205
Breakdown assistance Mobility
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can be
viewed on the iDrive or a connection to Roadside
Assistance can be established directly. Phone,
see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication.
Jump-starting
Notes
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Do not touch live parts
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical compo‐
nents while the engine is running.◀
Preparation
1.
Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This informa‐
tion can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Bodywork contact between vehicles
Make sure that there is no contact be‐
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐
wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀
Starting aid terminals
Connecting order
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury
from sparking.◀
The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine
compartment acts as the battery's positive ter‐
minal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
1.
Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter‐
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding engine or
body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of of
the vehicle to be started.
Seite 206
Mobility Breakdown assistance
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started
in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another
attempt in order to allow the discharged bat‐
tery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Tow-starting and towing
Manual transmission
Observe before towing your vehicle
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Towing
When the parking brake is blocked
The parking brake cannot be released
manually.
Do not tow the vehicle with the parking brake
blocked, or the vehicle can be damaged.
Contact your service center.◀
Follow the towing instructions
Follow all towing instructions; otherwise,
vehicle damage or accidents may occur.◀
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn
signals, and windshield wipers may be un‐
available.
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and steer‐
ing.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter than
the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not
be possible to control the vehicle response.
Tow truck
Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may
result.◀
Automatic transmission: transporting
your vehicle
Note
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Therefore, contact a service center in the event
of a breakdown.
Do not have the vehicle towed
Have your vehicle transported on a loading
platform only; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
Seite 207
Breakdown assistance Mobility
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Tow truck
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may
result.◀
Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for
maneuvering the vehicle only.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Light towing vehicle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will
not be possible to control the vehicle re‐
sponse.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited during cor‐
nering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that
the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on
the vehicle components when towing, always
use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attaching the tow rope correctly
Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is se‐
cured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the BMW. It is contained in the
onboard vehicle tool kit under the cargo floor
cover.
Tow fitting, information on use
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
only.
Seite 208
Mobility Breakdown assistance
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the ve‐
hicle can occur.◀
Screw thread
Push out the cover by pressing on the top edge.
Tow-starting
Automatic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
edied.
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start
the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 206.
If the vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con‐
verter, only tow-start while the engine is cold.
1.
Switch on the hazard warning system and
comply with local regulations.
2. Ignition, refer to page 63, on.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch
pedal pressed and slowly release the pedal.
After the engine starts, immediately press
on the clutch pedal again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard warn‐
ing system.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Seite 209
Breakdown assistance Mobility
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Care
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Car washes
Notes
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away
and use a maximum temperature of
140 ℉/60 ℃.
Holding them too close or using excessively
high pressures or temperatures can cause dam‐
age or preliminary damage that may then lead to
long-term damage.
Follow the operating instructions for the high-
pressure washer.◀
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-
pressure washers
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g.,
Park Distance Control, for extended periods of
time and only from a distance of at least
12 in/30 cm.◀
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐
ter.
Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ve‐
hicle.
Automatic car washes
Notes
Do not use high pressure washing sys‐
tems
With washing systems operating at high pres‐
sures and nozzle positions close to the windows,
drops of water can penetrate.◀
Note the following:
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or those
that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint
damage.
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width of
the vehicle.
▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
page 71,to avoid unintentional wiper activa‐
tion.
▷ Do not treat the convertible top with wax.
Ensure that a cycle without wax or a special
cycle for convertibles is available.
▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be
triggered by the interior motion sensor of the
alarm system. Follow the instructions on
avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to
page 42.
Guide rails in car washes
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
could be damaged.◀
Before driving into a car wash
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a car
wash, take the following steps:
Seite 210
Mobility Care
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Manual transmission:
1. Release the parking brake.
2. Drive into the car wash.
3. Shift to neutral.
4. Switch the engine off.
5. Switch on the ignition.
Automatic transmission:
1. Release parking brake, refer to page 67, and
deactivate Automatic Hold, refer to
page 68.
2. Drive into the car wash.
3. Depress the brake pedal as needed.
4. Engage transmission position N.
5. Switch the engine off. In this way, the igni‐
tion remains switched on, and a Check-Con‐
trol message is displayed.
Transmission position P with the igni‐
tion off
When the ignition is switched off, position P
is engaged automatically. When in an auto‐
matic car wash, for example, ensure that the
ignition is not switched off accidentally.◀
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
when in transmission position N. A signal is
sounded when an attempt is made to lock the
vehicle.
Transmission position
Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
Headlamps
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
caustic cleansers.
▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to
insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
▷ Thaw ice with deicing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can
occur.
Remove all residue completely from the wind‐
shields, otherwise streaking may cause loss of
visibility and wiper noise when the windshield
wipers are operated.
Vehicle care
Car care products
BMW recommends using cleaning and care
products from BMW, since these have been
tested and approved.
Car care and cleaning products
Follow the instructions on the container.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
cles.
Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
gerous and harmful to your health.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect
the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency
and extent of your car care to these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Seite 211
Care Mobility
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Caring for the convertible top
The appearance and life of the convertible top
depend on correct care and operation.
Note the following instructions:
▷ To prevent water stains, mildew spots, and
chafe marks, do not enclose the convertible
top in the convertible top well for a long pe‐
riod and do not fold and stow the convertible
top in the convertible top well while the top
is wet or frozen.
▷ Remove water stains that may nevertheless
have appeared on the headliner using a mi‐
crofiber cloth and an interior cleaner.
▷ When the vehicle is parked in enclosed
areas for lengthy periods, ensure that the
area is well ventilated.
▷ If possible, park the vehicle in the shade to
protect it from intensive solar radiation so
that color, rubber and fabric are not affected.
▷ Remove bird droppings immediately as their
corrosive effect will otherwise attack the
convertible top and damage the rubber
seals.
▷ Hard to remove tree sap or bird droppings
can be removed from the convertible top
with special tree sap remover and a soft
brush.
Do not use spot remover
Do not use spot remover, paint thinner,
solvent, gasoline, or similar products to remove
spots on the convertible top. These products
may destroy the rubber coating. Incorrect care
and cleaning may cause the convertible top and
its seams to become leaky.◀
To remove heavy soiling, especially for light col‐
ored convertible tops, use a special convertible
top cleaner.
Proceed as follows:
1.
Spray the convertible top with the
convertible top cleaner.
2. Make the convertible top cleaner foam up
using a well saturated sponge, moving it in
circular motions.
3. Finish washing the vehicle in the car wash or
rinse with ample amounts of water.
Otherwise, follow the instructions for use from
the manufacturer.
Treat the convertible top with an impregnating
agent after it has been washed three to five
times.
Suitable cleaners and car products can be ob‐
tained from the service department.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, provide leather care roughly every two
months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from the
service center.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a
soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable
interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
terial vigorously.
Seite 212
Mobility Care
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other
articles of clothing can damage the seat covers.
Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
Use wheel cleaner, particularly during the winter
months. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly
alkaline or abrasive cleaners, or steam jets
above 140 ℉/60 ℃; follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radiator
grille or door handles with an ample supply of
water, possibly with shampoo added, particu‐
larly when they have been exposed to road salt.
Rubber components
Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleans‐
ers.
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sil‐
icon-containing car care products in order to
avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft
cloth.
Plastic components
These include:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Headliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matte black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Lightly dampen the cloth with water.
Do not soak the headliner.
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
or solvents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to
surface damage.◀
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts
until they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
again after they were removed for cleaning, for
example.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the passenger
compartment for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To
prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
in the direction of travel only.
Seite 213
Care Mobility
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Sensors/cameras
To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth mois‐
tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
Displays/screens
Clean the displays with an antistatic microfiber
cloth.
Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household cleans‐
ers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
can result.◀
Long-term vehicle storage
Your service center can advise you on what to
consider when storing the vehicle for longer
than three months.
Seite 214
Mobility Care
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Seite 215
Care Mobility
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system, and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Technical data
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
Dimensions
Width, height
1 Vehicle height: 53.7 inches/1,365 mm
2 Vehicle width without mirrors: 74.6 inches/
1,894 mm
3 Vehicle width with mirrors: 81.9 inches/
2,081 mm
Seite 218
Reference Technical data
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Length, wheel base
1 Wheelbase: 112.4 inches/2,855 mm 2 Length: 192.8 inches/4,896 mm
Smallest turning circle
Dia.: 38.4 ft/11.7 m
Weights
640i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,115/2,320
Load lbs/kg 772/350
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,447/1,110
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,866/1,300
Cargo area capacity
With cargo area partition flipped up
cu ft/l
cu ft/l
10.6/300
12.4/350
Seite 219
Technical data Reference
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
650i
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission
Sport automatic transmission
lbs/kg
lbs/kg
5,401/2,450
5,401/2,450
Load lbs/kg 772/350
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,679/1,215
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,910/1,320
Cargo area capacity
With cargo area partition flipped up
cu ft/l
cu ft/l
10.6/300
12.4/350
650i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,467/2,480
Load lbs/kg 772/350
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,756/1,250
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,954/1,340
Cargo area capacity
With cargo area partition flipped up
cu ft/l
cu ft/l
10.6/300
12.4/350
Capacities
Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Fuel quality, refer
to page 178
Windshield and headlamp
washer system
US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5.0
Seite 220
Reference Technical data
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Short commands of the voice act. system
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series is
described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment
is also described that is not available in a vehicle,
e. g., because of the selected optional equip‐
ment or country variant. This also applies for
safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Instructions for voice activation system, refer to
page 22.
To have the available spoken instructions read
out loud: ›Voice commands‹
The following short commands are valid for ve‐
hicles with voice activation system. They do not
work in equipment packages with which only the
mobile phone can be operated by voice activa‐
tion.
Adjusting
Vehicle
Function Command
Open the main menu. ›Main menu‹
Open the options. ›Options‹
Open the settings. ›Settings‹
Info display of the instrument cluster. ›Info Display‹
Settings on the Control Display. ›Control display‹
Open the time and date. ›Time and date‹
Open the language and units. ›Language and units‹
Open the speed limit. ›Speed‹
Open the light. ›Lighting‹
Open the door lock. ›Door locks‹
Open the profiles. ›Profiles‹
Seite 221
Short commands of the voice act. system Reference
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Function Command
Open the Driving Mode menu. ›Driving mode‹
Open the ECO PRO menu. ›ECO PRO mode‹
Equipment
Function Command
Open the air conditioning settings. ›Climate‹
Open the Head-up Display. ›head up display‹
Vehicle information
Owner's Manual
Function Command
Open the Owner's Manual. ›Display Owner's Manual‹
Open the Quick Reference Guide. ›Quick reference‹
Open the index. ›Owner's Manual‹
Open the search by pictures. ›Search by pictures‹
Computer
Function Command
Call up the onboard computer. ›Onboard info‹
Call up the trip computer. ›Trip computer‹
Vehicle
Function Command
Open the vehicle information. ›Vehicle info‹
Open the vehicle status. ›Vehicle status‹
Call up ECO PRO tips. ›ECO PRO Tips‹
Seite 222
Reference Short commands of the voice act. system
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Function Command
Open EfficientDynamics menu. ›Efficient Dynamics‹
EfficientDynamics split screen. ›Split screen Efficient Dynamics‹
Navigation
General information
Function Command
Opens the Navigation menu. ›Navigation‹
Open the destination entry. ›Enter address‹
Enter the address. ›Enter address‹
Enter a town/city. ›City‹
Enter a state/province. ›State‹
Enter the postal code. ›Postal Code‹
Open destination guidance. ›Guidance‹
Start destination guidance. ›Start guidance‹
Terminate destination guidance. ›Stop guidance‹
Open the home address. ›Home address‹
Open the route criteria. ›Route preference‹
Open the route. ›Route information‹
Turn on spoken instructions. ›Switch on voice instructions‹
Repeat the spoken instruction. ›Repeat voice instructions‹
Turn off spoken instructions. ›Switch off voice instructions‹
Display the address book. ›Address book‹
Display the most recent destinations. ›Last destinations‹
Open the traffic bulletins. ›Traffic Info‹
Special destinations. ›Points of interest‹
Seite 223
Short commands of the voice act. system Reference
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Map
Function Command
Display the map. ›Map‹
Map facing north. ›Map facing north‹
Map facing the direction of travel. ›Map in direction of travel‹
Perspective map. ›Map perspective view‹
Automatic scaling of the map. ›Map with automatic scaling‹
Scale...feet. ›Map scale‹
Split screen settings
Function Command
Split screen. ›Switch on splitscreen‹
Switch off the split screen. ›Turn off split screen‹
Adjust the split screen. ›Split screen content‹
Split screen, map facing north. ›Split screen map facing north‹
Split screen, current position. ›Split screen current position‹
Split screen, facing the direction of travel. ›Split screen map in direction of travel‹
Split screen, perspective. ›Split screen perspective‹
Split screen, expanded intersection zoom. ›Splitscreen Exit ramp view‹
Split screen scale...feet. ›Split screen scale ... feet‹ e.g., split screen scale
100 feet
Split screen scale...meters. ›Split screen scale ... meters‹ e.g., split screen
scale 100 meters
Split screen scale...kilometers. ›Split screen scale ... kilometers‹ e.g., split screen
scale 5 kilometers
Split screen scale...miles. ›Split screen scale ... miles‹ e.g., split screen
scale 5 miles
Split screen, highlight the traffic situation. ›Split screen, Traffic conditions‹
Split screen, computer. ›Split screen on board info‹
Seite 224
Reference Short commands of the voice act. system
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Function Command
Split screen, trip computer. ›Splitscreen trip computer‹
Split screen, scale automatically. ›Split screen automatic scaling‹
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Function Command
Enter a new destination. ›Enter address‹
Trip list. ›Stored trips‹
Radio
FM
Function Command
Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... megahertz‹ e.g., 93.5 megahertz
or frequency 93.5
Open the radio. ›Radio‹
Open the FM stations. ›F M‹
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Select a frequency range. ›Select frequency‹
Open a station. ›Select station‹
AM
Function Command
Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... Kilohertz‹ e.g., frequency 753 or
753 kilohertz
Open the AM stations. ›A M‹
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Seite 225
Short commands of the voice act. system Reference
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Weather Band
Function Command
Open the Weather Band. ›Weather band‹
Switch on the Weather Band. ›Weather band on‹
Select a Weather Band station. ›Select a weather channel‹
Satellite radio
Function Command
Open the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio‹
Switch on the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio on‹
Select a satellite radio channel. ›Select satellite radio‹ e.g., satellite radio channel
2
Stored stations
Function Command
Open the stored stations. ›Presets‹
Choose a stored station. ›Select preset‹
Select a stored station. ›Preset ...‹ e. g., stored station 2
CD/multimedia
CD/DVD drive
Function Command
Select a track. ›Track ...‹ e.g., track 5
Or
›C D track ...‹ e.g., CD track 5
Play back a CD. ›C D on‹
Select a CD. ›Select C D‹
Select a CD and track. ›C D ... track ...‹ e.g., CD 3 track 5
Open the CD and Multimedia menus. ›C D and multimedia‹
Seite 226
Reference Short commands of the voice act. system
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Function Command
CD and DVD. ›C D‹
Select a DVD. ›D V D ...‹ e.g. DVD 3
Display the entertainment details on a split
screen.
›Entertainment details‹
Music collection
Function Command
Search for music, open a menu. ›Music search‹
Open the current playback. ›Current playback‹
Open the music collection. ›Music collection‹
Play back the music collection. ›Music collection on‹
Play back the most frequently played tracks. ›Top fifty‹
External devices
Function Command
Open the external devices. ›External devices‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
AUX at front. ›AUX front‹
Tone
Function Command
Open the tone settings. ›Tone‹
Telephone
Function Command
Dial a phone number. ›Dial number‹
Opens the Telephone menu. ›Telephone‹
Seite 227
Short commands of the voice act. system Reference
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Function Command
Display the phone book. ›Phonebook‹
Redialing. ›Redial‹
Display received calls. ›Received calls‹
List of messages. ›Messages‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
Office
Function Command
Open the Office menu. ›Office‹
Display Office Today. ›Current office‹
Display the contacts. ›Contacts‹
Display the messages. ›Messages‹
Display the calendar. ›Calendar‹
Display the tasks. ›Tasks‹
Display the reminders. ›Reminders‹
BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive
Function Command
Open BMW Assist.
Open ConnectedDrive.
›B M W Assist‹
›Connected Drive‹
Open BMW Search. ›B M W Online‹
Seite 228
Reference Short commands of the voice act. system
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Seite 229
Short commands of the voice act. system Reference
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 118
ACC, Active Cruise Control
with Stop & Go 126
Activated-charcoal filter 151
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 115
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go, ACC 126
Active seat, front 53
Active seat ventilation,
front 53
Active Steering, integral 121
Adaptive brake assistant 118
Adaptive brake lights, refer to
Brake force display 117
Adaptive drive 121
Adaptive light control 95
Additives, oil 192
Adjustments, seats/head re‐
straints 51
After washing vehicle 211
Airbags 98
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 99
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated-air mode 150
Air, dehumidifying, refer to
Cooling function 150
Air distribution, manual 149
Air flow, automatic climate
control 149
Air pressure, tires 179
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐
tion 151
Alarm system 40
Alarm, unintentional 42
All around the center con‐
sole 14
All around the interior rearview
mirror 15
All around the steering
wheel 12
ALL program, automatic cli‐
mate control 150
All-season tires, refer to Win‐
ter tires 187
All-wheel-drive 120
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 154
Alternative oil types 192
Ambient light 97
Antifreeze, washer fluid 72
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 118
Anti-slip control, refer to
DSC 118
Approved axle load 219
Approved engine oils 192
Armrest, refer to Front center
armrest 159
Arrival time 89
Ashtray 155
Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
tance 205
Assistance when driving
off 118
AUTO H button, refer to Auto‐
matic Hold 68
AUTO intensity 149
Automatic car wash 210
Automatic Cruise Control with
Stop & Go 126
Automatic Curb Monitor 58
Automatic deactivation, front
passenger airbags 99
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 94
Automatic Hold 68
Automatic locking 38
Automatic recirculated-air
control 150
Automatic Soft Closing,
doors 38
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 73
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 149
AUTO program, intensity 149
Auto Start/Stop function 65
Average fuel consumption 88
Average speed 88
Axle loads, weights 219
B
Backrest curvature, refer to
Lumbar support 52
Backrest, seats 51
Backrest, width 52
Backup camera 136
Band-aids, refer to First aid
kit 205
Bar for tow-starting/tow‐
ing 208
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 202
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 30
Battery, vehicle 202
Belts, safety belts 54
Beverage holder, cu‐
pholder 159
BMW Assist, see user's
manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communica‐
tion
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem 195
Seite 230
Reference Everything from A to Z
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 159
Brake assistant 118
Brake assistant, adaptive 118
Brake discs, breaking in 164
Brake force display 117
Brake lamps, brake force dis‐
play 117
Brake lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 200
Brake lights, adaptive 117
Brake pads, breaking in 164
Braking, notes 165
Breakdown assis‐
tance 204, 205
Breaking in 164
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 91
Bulb replacement 198
Bulb replacement, front 0
Bulb replacement, rear 200
Bulbs and lamps 198
Button, RES 128
Button, Start/Stop 63
Bypassing, refer to Jump-
starting 206
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 7
Camera, backup camera 137
Camera, care 214
Camera, Side View 141
Camera, Top View 139
Can holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 159
Car battery 202
Car care products 211
Care, displays 214
Care, vehicle 211
Cargo 167
Cargo area lid 38
Cargo area partition 46
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 160
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 168
Car key, refer to Remote con‐
trol 30
Carpet, care 213
Car wash 210
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 165
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 195
CD/Multimedia, see user's
manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communica‐
tion
Center console 14
Central locking system 33
Central screen, refer to Control
Display 16
Changes, technical, refer to
Safety 7
Changing parts 198
Changing wheels 201
Changing wheels/tires 186
Check Control 80
Children, seating position 60
Children, transporting
safely 60
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tem 60
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 61
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 60
Child seat, mounting 60
Child seats 60
Chrome parts, care 213
Cigarette lighter 155
Cleaning, displays 214
Climate control 148
Climate control wind‐
shield 165
Clock 83
Closing/opening from in‐
side 37
Closing/opening via door
lock 37
Closing/opening with remote
control 34
Collision warning 107, 109
Combination switch, refer to
Turn signals 69
Combination switch, refer to
Wiper system 70
COMFORT+ program, Driving
Experience Switch 124
Comfort Access 39
COMFORT program, Driving
Experience Switch 124
Computer 87
Condensation on win‐
dows 149
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 166
Condition Based Service
CBS 195
Configure driving mode 124
Confirmation signal 36
ConnectedDrive, see user's
manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communica‐
tion
Control Display 16
Control Display, settings 90
Controller 16
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 118
Convenient closing 35
Convenient opening 35
Convertible, convertible
top 43
Convertible mode, automatic
climate control 149
Convertible program, auto‐
matic climate control 149
Convertible top 43
Convertible top, care 212
Convertible top, cargo area
partition 46
Convertible top, emergency
operation 46
Convertible top, rollover pro‐
tection system 101
Seite 231
Everything from A to Z Reference
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Convertible top tool 46
Coolant 194
Coolant temperature 83
Cooling function 150
Cooling, maximum 150
Cooling system 194
Corrosion on brake discs 166
Cruise control 132
Cruise control, active with
Stop & Go 126
Cruising range 84
Cupholder 159
Current fuel consumption 84
D
Damage, tires 185
Damping control, dy‐
namic 121
Data, technical 218
Date 83
Daytime running lights 94
Defrosting, refer to Windows,
defrosting 149
Dehumidifying, air 150
Destination distance 88
Digital clock 83
Dimensions 218
Dimmable exterior mirrors 58
Dimmable interior rearview
mirror 58
Direction indicator, refer to
Turn signals 69
Display in windshield 146
Display lighting, refer to Instru‐
ment lighting 96
Displays 76, 77
Displays, cleaning 214
Disposal, vehicle battery 202
Distance control, refer to
PDC 134
Distance, selecting for
ACC 128
Distance to destination 88
Divided screen view, split
screen 20
Door lock, refer to Remote
control 30
Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐
ing 38
Downhill control 120
Drive-off assistant 118
Drive-off assistant, refer to
DSC 118
Driving Experience
Switch 122
Driving instructions, breaking
in 164
Driving mode 122
Driving notes, general 164
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 118
Driving tips 164
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 118
DTC driving dynamics 119
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 119
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 121
Dynamic Drive 121
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 118
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 119
E
ECO PRO 170
ECO PRO display 170
ECO PRO mode 170
EfficientDynamics 172
Electronic displays, instru‐
ment cluster 77
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to DSC 118
Emergency detection, remote
control 31
Emergency operation,
convertible top 46
Emergency release, door
lock 37
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 176
Emergency Request 204
Emergency service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 205
Emergency start function, en‐
gine start 31
Emergency unlocking, trunk
lid 39
Energy Control 84
Energy recovery 84
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 65
Engine, automatic switch-
off 65
Engine compartment 189
Engine compartment, working
in 189
Engine coolant 194
Engine oil 191
Engine oil, adding 192
Engine oil additives 192
Engine oil change 192
Engine oil filler neck 192
Engine oil temperature 83
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 192
Engine oil types, ap‐
proved 192
Engine start during malfunc‐
tion 31
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 206
Engine start, refer to Starting
the engine 64
Engine stop 64
Engine temperature 83
Entering/exiting vehicle, assis‐
tance, steering wheel 59
Entering a car wash 210
Equipment, interior 153
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, refer to DSC 118
Exchanging wheels/tires 186
Exhaust system 165
Seite 232
Reference Everything from A to Z
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Exterior mirror, automatic dim‐
ming feature 58
Exterior mirrors 57
External start 206
External temperature dis‐
play 83
External temperature warn‐
ing 83
Eyes for securing cargo 168
F
Failure message, refer to
Check Control 80
False alarm, refer to Uninten‐
tional alarm 42
Fan, refer to Air flow 149
Fault displays, refer to Check
Control 80
Filler neck for engine oil 192
Fine wood, care 213
First aid kit 205
Fitting for towing, refer to Tow
fitting 208
Flat tire, changing wheels 201
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 105
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 102
Flat tire, warning
lamp 103, 106
Flooding 165
Floor carpet, care 213
Floor mats, care 213
Fold-out position, windshield
wipers 72
Foot brake 165
Front airbags 98
Front center armrest 159
Front fog lamps 96
Front lamps 0
Front passenger airbags, au‐
tomatic deactivation 99
Front passenger airbags, indi‐
cator lamp 100
Front seats 51
Front turn signals, refer to
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 199
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 105
Fuel cap 176
Fuel consumption, current 84
Fuel consumption, refer to
Average fuel consump‐
tion 88
Fuel filler flap 176
Fuel gauge 83
Fuel quality 178
Fuel, tank capacity 220
Fuse 203
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 153
Gasoline 178
Gasoline quality 178
Gear change, automatic trans‐
mission 73
Gear shift indicator 85
General driving notes 164
Glove compartment 158
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 219
H
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 67
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 154
Hazard warning flashers 204
HDC Hill Descent Control 120
Headlamp control, auto‐
matic 94
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture 94
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture via remote control 35
Headlamp flasher 70
Headlamp glass 199
Headlamps 0
Headlamps, care 211
Headlamp washer system 70
Head restraints 51
Head restraints, front 55
Head-Up Display 146
Head-up Display, care 214
Heavy cargo, stowing 168
Height, seats 51
Height, vehicle 218
High-beam Assistant 95
High beams 70
High beams/low beams, refer
to High-beam Assistant 95
Hill Descent Control HDC 120
Hills 166
Hill start assistant, refer to
Drive-off assistant 118
Hints 6
Holder for beverages 159
Homepage 6
Hood 189
Horn 12
Hotel function, trunk lid 39
Hot exhaust system 165
HUD Head-Up Display 146
Hydroplaning 165
I
Ice warning, refer to External
temperature warning 83
Icy roads, refer to External
temperature warning 83
Identification marks, tires 184
Identification number, refer to
Important features in the en‐
gine compartment 189
iDrive 16
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control 30
Ignition off 63
Ignition on 63
Indication of a flat
tire 103, 106
Individual air distribution 149
Seite 233
Everything from A to Z Reference
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 31
Inflation pressure, tires 179
Inflation pressure warning
FTM, tires 105
Info display, refer to Com‐
puter 87
Initialization, Integral Active
Steering 122
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 103
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 106
Instrument cluster 76
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 77
Instrument display, multifunc‐
tional 77
Instrument lighting 96
Integral Active Steering 121
Integrated key 30
Integrated universal remote
control 153
Intensity, AUTO program 149
Interior equipment 153
Interior lamps 97
Interior lamps via remote con‐
trol 35
Interior motion sensor 41
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐
matic dimming feature 58
Internet page 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 84
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 201
Jack, refer to Vehicle jack 201
Joystick, automatic transmis‐
sion 73
Jump-starting 206
K
Key/remote control 30
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Access 39
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 31
Kickdown, automatic trans‐
mission 73
Knee airbag 98
L
Lamp replacement 198
Lamp replacement, front 0
Lamp replacement, rear 200
Lamps 93
Lamps and bulbs 198
Lane departure warning 114
Lane margin, warning 114
Language on Control Dis‐
play 91
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 168
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 61
Leather, care 212
LED headlamps, Bulb replace‐
ment 200
LED light 200
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 199
Length, vehicle 219
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 21
License plate lamp, bulb re‐
placement 200
Light-alloy wheels, care 213
Light control 95
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 199
Lighting 93
Lighting, speaker 97
Lighting via remote control 35
Light switch 93
Load 167
Loading 167
Lock, door 37
Locking/unlocking from in‐
side 37
Locking/unlocking via door
lock 37
Locking/unlocking with re‐
mote control 34
Locking, automatic 38
Locking, central 33
Locking via trunk lid 39
Low beams 93
Low beams, automatic, refer to
High-beam Assistant 95
Lower back support 52
Lug bolt lock 202
Lumbar support 52
M
Maintenance 195
Maintenance require‐
ments 195
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 84
Maintenance system,
BMW 195
Malfunction displays, refer to
Check Control 80
Manual air distribution 149
Manual air flow 149
Manual brake, refer to Parking
brake 67
Manual mode, transmis‐
sion 74
Manual operation, backup
camera 137
Manual operation, door
lock 37
Manual operation, exterior mir‐
rors 58
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 176
Manual operation, Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 135
Seite 234
Reference Everything from A to Z
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Manual operation, Side
View 141
Manual operation, Top
View 140
Manual transmission 72
Marking on approved
tires 186
Marking, run-flat tires 187
Massage seat, front 53
Master key, refer to Remote
control 30
Maximum cooling 150
Maximum speed, display 85
Maximum speed, winter
tires 187
Measure, units of 91
Medical kit 205
Memory for seat, mirrors,
steering wheel 56
Menu, EfficientDynamics 172
Menu in instrument cluster 87
Menus, operating, iDrive 16
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐
ing concept 17
Messages, refer to Check
Control 80
Microfilter 151
Minimum tread, tires 185
Mirror 57
Mirror memory 56
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 165
Modifications, technical, refer
to Safety 7
Moisture in headlamp 199
Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐
play 16
Mounting of child restraint fix‐
ing systems 60
Multifunctional instrument
display 77
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 12
N
Navigation, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Neck restraints, front, refer to
Head restraints 55
New wheels and tires 186
Night Vision with pedestrian
detection 111
No Passing Information 85
Nylon rope for tow-starting/
towing 208
O
OBD Onboard Diagnos‐
tics 196
Obstacle marking, backup
camera 138
Octane rating, refer to Gaso‐
line quality 178
Odometer 83
Office, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Oil 191
Oil, adding 192
Oil additives 192
Oil change 192
Oil change interval, service re‐
quirements 84
Oil filler neck 192
Oil types, alternative 192
Oil types, approved 192
Old batteries, disposal 202
Onboard Diagnostics
OBD 196
Onboard monitor, refer to
Control Display 16
Onboard vehicle tool kit 198
Opening/closing from in‐
side 37
Opening/closing via door
lock 37
Opening/closing with remote
control 34
Operating concept, iDrive 16
Optional equipment, standard
equipment 6
Outside air, refer to Automatic
recirculated-air control 150
Overheating of engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 83
Overtaking prohibitions 85
P
Paint, vehicle 211
Panic mode 35
Parallel parking assistant 142
Park Distance Control
PDC 134
Parked-car ventilation 152
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 166
Parking aid, refer to PDC 134
Parking assistant 142
Parking brake 67
Parking lamps 93
Parking lamps and roadside
parking lamps, refer to Light-
emitting diodes, LEDs 199
Parking with Auto Hold 68
Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 58
Pathway lines, backup cam‐
era 138
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 134
Pedestrian detection, refer to
Night Vision 111
People detection, refer to
Night Vision 111
Personal Profile 31
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 43
Plastic, care 213
Power failure 202
Power windows 42
Seite 235
Everything from A to Z Reference
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 179
Pressure warning FTM,
tires 105
Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐
file 31
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 20
Protective function, win‐
dows 43
Push-and-turn switch, refer to
Controller 16
R
Radiator fluid 194
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control 30
Radio ready state 64
Radio, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Rain sensor 71
Rear axle steering 121
Rear lamps 200
Rearview mirror 57
Rear window defroster 150
Recirculated-air mode 150
Recommended tire
brands 186
Refueling 176
Remaining range 84
Remote control/key 30
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 36
Remote control, universal 153
Replacement fuse 203
Replacing parts 198
Replacing wheels/tires 186
Reporting safety defects 8
RES button 128
Reserve warning, refer to
Range 84
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 103
Residual heat, automatic cli‐
mate control 151
Retaining straps, securing
cargo 168
Retreaded tires 186
Reversing lamp, bulb replace‐
ment 201
Roadside parking lamps 94
Rollover protection sys‐
tem 101
Roll stabilization, refer to
Adaptive Drive 121
Roll stabilization, refer to Dy‐
namic Drive 121
RON gasoline quality 178
Rope for tow-starting/tow‐
ing 208
RSC Run Flat System Compo‐
nent, refer to Run-flat
tires 187
Rubber components,
care 213
Run-flat tires 187
S
Safe braking 165
Safety 7
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passenger
seat 55
Safety belts 54
Safety belts, care 213
Safety systems, airbags 98
Saving fuel 0
Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
play 16
Screwdriver 198
Screw thread for tow fit‐
ting 209
Seat belts, refer to Safety
belts 54
Seat heating, front 53
Seating position for chil‐
dren 60
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory 56
Seats 51
Seat ventilation, front 53
Selection list in instrument
cluster 87
Selector lever, automatic
transmission 73
Sensors, care 214
Service and warranty 7
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service CBS 195
Service requirements, dis‐
play 84
Service, Roadside Assis‐
tance 205
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 90
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
rors, steering wheel 56
Shifting, automatic transmis‐
sion 73
Shifting, manual transmis‐
sion 72
Shift paddles on steering
wheel 74
Short commands 221
Shoulder support 53
Side airbags 98
Side View 141
Signaling, horn 12
Signals when unlocking 36
Sitting safely 51
Size 218
Ski bag 156
Smallest turning circle 219
Smoker's package 155
Snow chains 187
Socket 156
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 196
SOS button 204
Spare fuse 203
Speaker lighting 97
Specified engine oil
types 192
Seite 236
Reference Everything from A to Z
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Speed, average 88
Speed limit detection, on‐
board computer 89
Speed limiter, display 85
Speed Limit Information 85
Speed limit in the com‐
puter 89
Split screen 20
SPORT+ program, Dynamic
Driving Control 123
Sport automatic transmis‐
sion 74
SPORT program, Dynamic
Driving Control 123
Sport program, transmis‐
sion 74
Stability control systems 118
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 65
Start/Stop button 63
Start function during malfunc‐
tion 31
Starting the engine 64
Status display, tires 102
Status information, iDrive 19
Status of Owner's Manual 6
Steering, Integral Active
Steering 121
Steering wheel, adjusting 59
Steering wheel heating 59
Steering wheel memory 56
Steptronic, automatic trans‐
mission 73
Stopping the engine 64
Storage compartments 158
Storage compartments, loca‐
tions 158
Storage, tires 187
Storing the vehicle 214
Summer tires, tread 185
Supplementary text mes‐
sage 82
Surround View 136
Suspension settings 122
Switch for Dynamic Driving
Control 122
Switch-on times, parked-car
ventilation 152
Switch, refer to Cockpit 12
Symbols 6
T
Tachometer 83
Tail and brake lamps 200
Tailgate 38
Tailgate via remote control 35
Tail lamps 200
Tail lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 200
Technical changes, refer to
Safety 7
Technical data 218
Telephone, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 149
Temperature display, external
temperature 83
Temperature, engine oil 83
Tempomat, refer to Active
Cruise Control 126
Terminal, jump-starting 206
Text message, supplemen‐
tary 82
Theft alarm system, refer to
Alarm system 40
Theft protection, lug
bolts 202
Theft protection, refer to Cen‐
tral locking system 33
Thermal camera, refer to Night
Vision 111
Thigh support 52
Tilt alarm sensor 41
Tilt, seats 51
Time of arrival 89
Tire damage 185
Tire identification marks 184
Tire inflation pressure 179
Tire inflation pressure monitor,
refer to FTM 105
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 102
Tires, changing 186
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 179
Tires, run-flat tires 187
Tire tread 185
Tone, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Tools 198
Top View 139
Total vehicle weight 219
Tow fitting 208
Towing 207
Tow-starting 207
Tow truck 207
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 102
Traction control 119
TRACTION program, Dynamic
Driving Control 123
Transmission, automatic 73
Transmission, manual 72
Transporting children
safely 60
Tread, tires 185
Trip computer 89
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 70
Trip odometer 83
Truck for tow-starting/tow‐
ing 207
Trunk, cargo area partition 46
Trunk lid 38
Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐
ing 39
Trunk lid, hotel function 39
Trunk lid via remote con‐
trol 35
Turning circle 219
Turning circle lines, backup
camera 138
Turn signals, operation 69
Seite 237
Everything from A to Z Reference
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
placement 200
U
Unintentional alarm 42
Units of measure 91
Universal remote control 153
Unlock button, automatic
transmission 73
Unlocking/locking from in‐
side 37
Unlocking/locking via door
lock 37
Unlocking/locking with remote
control 34
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 6
Upholstery care 212
USB interface 158
V
Variable steering, Integral Ac‐
tive Steering 121
Vehicle battery 202
Vehicle battery, replacing 202
Vehicle, breaking in 164
Vehicle care 211
Vehicle equipment 6
Vehicle identification number,
refer to Identification number
in the engine compart‐
ment 189
Vehicle jack 201
Vehicle paint 211
Vehicle storage 214
Vehicle wash 210
Ventilation 151
Ventilation, refer to Parked-car
ventilation 152
Voice activation, short com‐
mands 221
Voice activation system 22
W
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 80
Warning triangle 205
Washer fluid 72
Washer fluid reservoir, ca‐
pacity 220
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 72
Washer system 70
Washing, vehicle 210
Water on roads 165
Weights 219
Welcome lamps 93
Wheel base, vehicle 219
Wheels, changing 186
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 179
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 105
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 102
Width, vehicle 218
Wind deflector 49
Window defroster, rear 150
Windows, powered 42
Windshield, climate con‐
trol 165
Windshield washer fluid 72
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 72
Windshield washer system 70
Windshield wiper 70
Windshield wipers, fold-out
position 72
Winter storage, care 214
Winter tires, suitable tires 187
Winter tires, tread 185
Wiper blades, replacing 198
Wiper fluid 72
Wiper system 70
Wood, care 213
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 21
Wrench 198
X
xDrive 120
Xenon headlamps, bulb re‐
placement 199
Seite 238
Reference Everything from A to Z
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
The Ultimate Driving
Machine
01 40 2 903 169 ue
*BL2903169000*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 903 169 - 07 12 490
